Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutB07-0066 Project Manual Volume I (Division 1-Division 5)1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 I 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE - NORTH Town of Vail, Colorado PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME I Construction Documents F EBRUARY 16, 2007 MELICK ASSOCIATES, INC. Architecture - Interiors - Planning 355 Teller Street, Suite 370, Lakewood, Colorado 80226 Prepared by Dwight Stone S PEC �y" design ,aY \l��P 1 r. ;® AA i 0 �'dWau�a�r� LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PROJECT DIRECTORY PROJECT Lion Square Lodge North 660 W.Lionshead Place Vail, Colorado OWNER Lion Square Lodge North 660 W. Lionshead Place Vail, CO 81657 (970) 477 -4432 Fax (970) DEVELOPER Viele Development, LLC 1000 S. Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 GENERAL CONTRACTOR Viele Construction, LLC 1000 S_ Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 ARCHITECT Melick Associates, Inc. 355 S. Teller Street, Suite 370 Lakewood, Colorado 80226 (303) 534 -1930 Fax (303) 534 -1931 CIVIL ENGINEER Peak Land Consulting North Frontage Road Vail, Colorado 81657 (970) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Monroe & Newell 1701 Wynkoop, Suite 200 Denver, Colorado 80202 (303) 6234927 Fax (303) 623 -6602 SOILS INVESTIGATION Koechlein Consulting Lakewood, CO MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL Architectural Engineering Consultants (AEC) ENGINEER P.O. Box 8489 Avon, Colorado 81620 970 - 748 -8520 FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER Shaner Life Safety LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE Neils Luneeford Silverthorne, Colorado PROJECT DIRECTORY I LION SQUARE LoDcE NORTH Vail, Colorado ' TABLE OF CONTENTS - VOLUME I Supplementary Conditions of the Contract DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 100 Summary 01210 Allowances 01230 Alternates 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01290 Payment Procedures 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01310 Form Request for Interpretation Form (RFI) 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures 01400 Quality Requirements 01420 References 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01524 Construction Waste Management 01600 Product Requirements 01600 Form Substitution Request Form 01700 Execution Requirements 01731 Cutting and Patching 01732 Selective Demolition 01770 Closeout Procedures ' 01781 Project Record Documents 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 1 02080 Utility Materials 02085 Interceptors 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 02300 Earthwork 02370 Slope Protection and Erosion Control 02510 Water Distribution 02530 Sanitary Sewer System 02552 Ground -Loop Heat Pump Piping 02620 Subdrainage 02630 Storm Drainage 02732 Roadway Base 02751 Cement Concrete Pavement 02764 Pavement Joint Sealants 02768 Decorative Cement Concrete Pavement 02780 Unit Pavers 02832 Segmental Retaining Walls 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE � o 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete ® 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete 03542 Cement -Based Underlayment o DIVISION 4 — MASONRY ' 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04860 Stone Masonry TABLE OF CONTENTS — VOLUME I TOC - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado DIVISION 5 — METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck 05400 Cold- Formed Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05511 Metal Stairs 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings 05530 Gratings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06130 Heavy Timber Construction 06160 Sheathing 06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06415 Stone Countertops DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07141 Cold Fluid - Applied Waterproofing 07210 Building Insulation 07311 Asphalt Shingles 07411 Metal Roof Panels 07460 Siding 07540 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07551 APP - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07720 Snow Retention System 07811 Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials 07841 Through - Penetration Firestop Systems 07842 Fire- Resistive Joint Systems 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08213 Metal Clad Doors 08305 Access Doors and Frames 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 08332 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors 08334 Overhead Coiling Grilles 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors 08460 Automatic Entrance Doors 08550 Aluminum Clad Wood Windows 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09250 Gypsum Board 09265 Gypsum Board Shaft -Wall Assemblies 09310 Floor and Wall Tile 09385 Dimension Stone "file 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09680 Carpet TABLE OF CONTENTS — VOLUME eo ��a���ti�� re � 41, 1 lb 0 m � arm TOC -2 1 1 1 t L Lj � I 1 t t l� 09720 09900 t t t 1 r 1 t I_l Wall Coverings Painting DIVISION 10 —SPECIALTIES 10155 Toilet Compartments 10200 Louvers and Vents (Chimney Cap) 10265 Impact- Resistant Wall Protection 10300 Prefabricated Fireplaces 10425 Signage 10506 Wood Lockers 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10801 Toilet and Bathroom Accessories DIVISION II— EQUIPMENT 11015 Rope Descent System l 1 150 Parking Control Equipment DIVISION 12 —FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 —SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 Roped Hydraulic Elevators CONTINUED IN VOLUME 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS — VOLUME LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado o ® r 4 qb , c i 40 ��ae�a� TOC - 3 1 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The Supplementary Conditions change and amend the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, of the American Institute of Architects. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified by these Supplementary Conditions or by Division 1 requirements, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS Al the end of this clause add the following sentences and subelauses: Revise Subparagraph 3.18.1 to read: 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of (lie Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) The preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) The giving of or failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage, and is required under the terms of this Agreement. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.2.3.1 Addenda and Architect's Supplemental Instructions take precedence over original construction documents. 1.2.3.2 Should there be conflict within Specifications, on Drawings or between the Specifications and Drawings, Developer /Contractor shall notify Architect before proceeding and Architect shall decide which 1 stipulation will provide best installation and his decision shall be final. 1.2.3.3 In drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACTOR Revise the following Subparagraph(s) as indicated: 3.3.1 The contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for providing and maintaining a safe place to work, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract and (1) to review any specified construction or installation procedure, including those recommended by the manufacturers; (2) to advise the Architect (a) if the specified procedure deviates from good construction practice, (b) if following the procedure will affect any warranties, including the Contractor's general warranty, or (c) of any objections the Contractor may have to the procedure; and (3) to propose any alternative procedure which the Contractor will wan 3.4 Labor and materials: Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.3 to 3.4 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified with full disclosure by the Contractor of functional, material, cost, and other differences between the products. Paragraph 3.18 Revise Subparagraph 3.18.1 to read: 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of (lie Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) The preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) The giving of or failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage, and is required under the terms of this Agreement. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado ARTICLE 4 — ADMINISTRATION Paragraph 4.1 i Revise Subparagraph 4. l.2 to read: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. In the event the Architect is not contractually obligated to provide some or all services during the construction phase, and unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall be responsible, and hold the Architect harmless, for those construction related services stipulated throughout this document or as may otherwise be required_ Paragraph 4.2 Revise Subparagraph 4.2.2 to read: 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work as permanent improvements and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on -site observations as an Architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of (lie progress of the Work for the existing building. Revise Subparagraph 4.2.8 to read: 4.2.8 The Architect may prepare ASI's and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. ARTICLE 5 — SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.1 Add the following Clause: 5.3.2 Before doing any work, each subcontractor shall verify measurements at (lie job -site pertaining to his work and shall be responsible for correctness of same, Any variations in actual and drawn dimensions shall be submitted to Architect for consideration before proceeding with work. ARTICLE 7 — CHANGES IN THE WORK The Owner and General Contractor shall agree to procedures for changes, and the Owner may make such t changes without invalidating the Contract. Reasonable charges for Contractor's overhead and profit and subcontractor mark shall be agreed to by the Owner and General Contractor prior to execution of a Change Order. ARTICLE I 1 — INSURANCE AND BONDS 1 1. L 1 In the 2 nd line after the words "in a company or companies" DELETE the words "lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located' and in that place INSERT the words "licensed to do business in the State of Colorado with the Owner, Architect and his Consultants as nanted insureds;" Revise Subparagraph H. to read: 1 1.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 1 1.1.1 of AIA A201 shall be written for not less than limits of liability stipulated by the Owner or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado ARTICLE 12 — UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 122.2 ADD: "General Contractor shall, in case of work performed by his subcontractors and where guarantees are required, secure warranties from subcontractors and deliver same to Owner upon completion of work. Should any defects develop in aforesaid work within specified periods due to faults in materials or workmanship, contractor(s) shall make repairs and do necessary work to correct defective work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Repairs and corrective work, including costs of making good other work damaged by or otherwise affected by making of repairs or corrective work, shall be accomplished without cost to Owner and at entire cost and expense of contractor(s) within mutually agreed upon time frame and after written notice from Owner. Nothing herein intends to imply that guaranty shall apply to work which has been abused or neglected by Owner of successor(s) in interest. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3 LION SQUARE LOI)ctE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01100- SUMMARY PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of selective demolition, addition and renovation of the existing hotel condominium units at Lion Square Lodge North, in Vail, Colorado. Additions to include the construction of two (2) core and shell towers to be six (6) stories tall. B. Owner and Lot Location: Lion Square Lodge North, 600 West Lionshead Place, Vail, Colorado C. Developer: Viele Development, LLC, 1000 South Frontage Road, Vail, Colorado D. General Contractor: Viele Construction, LLC, 1000 South Frontage Road, Vail, Colorado E_ Architect: Melick Associates, Inc., 355 Teller Street, Suite 370, Lakewood, Colorado. F. Geotechnieal Report: Obtain copy from Owner or Architect. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work consists of the construction of additions to all four sides of the existing building, the addition of a parking structure, the addition of a six story west tower, and the addition of a six story east tower. B. The scope of work is a core and shell package and does not inelude the interiors of the new condominiums in the two six story towers or the remodels of the interiors of the existing units. C. The construction type is III -B at the existing units. V -B at the existing one story structure remaining between the north property line and setback line. and IB at the new lowers. D. The occupancy type is R -2. E. The stnuctural frame is wood at the existing building and structural steel at the new towers and parking structure. F. The major systems in the building include architectural. structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems. G. The scope of the project is further defined as: I . Bedroom additions 2. Deck additions including adjacent living room and loft expansions 3. Multi -level parking structure 4. Locker rooms. workout room, one gunnite hot lub 5. Owner boot room 6. Replace north and south decks'balconics 7. West end unit extensions (4' deep) at ov, ?ner's direct expense g. Developer responsible for unforeseen conditions 9. Developer to protect existing units and use during construction 10. Remove_ store and reinstall all owner furnishings 11. 3 hour lire walls (or as required by code) between existing building and new buildings SUMMARY 01100 - 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 12. Two hour rated egress stair enclosures 13. Provide fire proofing between units as required by state and local codes 14. New Condo Units 15. Construction type I B for occupancy and height building code requirements 16. Building permit, plan check, planning and DRB fees H. Scope of work not included: 1. Existing unit fireplaces replacements 2. Existing unit interior design or remodel 3. South end unit living room expansion to south Summary of Code Restrictions: All codes and regulations in effect at the site as of Febmary 16, 2007 shall apply. Summary of fees: I . The Developer will pay for all permits and utility construction fees, including development fees. 2. If required, the Developer will pay for utility service company capital cost development fees and /or plant investment fees and relocation of public utilities. 3. The Developer is to provide Builder's Risk Insurance coverage including deductibles. K. Summary of items not covered by the Project Manual: The following list covers items of work not provided for under the specification manual. This is not a complete list and is intended only to indicate some of the major items that will not be included. These costs should be covered by the Developer under a separate budget for soft or indirect costs for the project. 1. Architect fees 2. Special consulting fees 3. Land survey 4. Utility development fees - tap fees 5. "testing and inspections 6. Builders Risk Insurance 7, Dewatering 8. Soils report 9. Telephone 10. Payment and performance bond (available if requested) 11. Models or renderings 13 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed tinder a single prime contract between Developer and General Contractor. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction to be AIA Document A201 except as amended or supplemented by the Supplementary General Conditions. These General and Supplementary Conditions shall apply to all work of the Project and all sections of these specifications. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate Fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly. without interfering with or delaying work tinder this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. SUMMARY 01100-2 1 1 t 1 1 J L t t t t [I 1 1 1 1 1.5 USE OF PREMISES LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. General: Contractor shall have frill use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owners right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative's written permission. 1 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Formal: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16- division format and CSI /CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. I. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross - referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division I govern clue execution of the Wort: of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words. and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions areas follows: I _ Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not staled, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall." "shall be." or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 100 SUMMARY 01100-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART l - GENERAL I.f SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements goveming the following: I. Lump -sum allowances. 2. Unit -cost allowances. 3. Quantity allowances. 4. Contingency allowances. 5. Testing and inspecting allowances. B. See Division I Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. C. See Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures goveming the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. Al the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections_ Include recommendalions that are relevant to perforating the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. ALLOWANCES 01210- 1 Llov SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner tinder allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance_ B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of Contractor engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. 13 . The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum. C. Costs ol'services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in (lie testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.3 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. I. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. ALLONVANCES 01210-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No( Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES I. Allowance Nl: S45.00 per square yard for new floor finish installed in each residential unit. Allowance is for the complete installed system. END OF SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES 01210-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01230 -ALTERNATES PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. I. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Stum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE- OF ALTERNATES A. See Drawings for a complete list of alternates for the project. END OF SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 01230- 1 I 1 r I t 1 r r L7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections: Division I Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A_ Owner- Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C, Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractors Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor - Initialed Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts_ 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 Fl J LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms provided by Owner. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document 6701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714_ Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. I. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost - loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. I. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative fonns and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b_ Submittals Schedule. C. Contractors Construction Schedule_ 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the followin" for each itcm listed: PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. I) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one - hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items tinder required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in flue amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete_ Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum_ 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Owner's Representative and paid for by Owner. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and Final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 13. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Docwnent G702 and AIA Document 6703 Continuation Sheets or fornu provided by the Owners Representative as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: sign legal documents on action. Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 t t F1 i i t 1 J 1 1 5 �J LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I . Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. r 1 1 1 r F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: Refer to Exhibit of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: I . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work- 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. H_ Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: I. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement. accountine for final chances to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner look possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Jl ti r1�H �i�I 5f:7•�iA 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule, 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I _ Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one pan of (fie Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensue maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. I. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of' other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work_ Stich administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: PROJECT IVIANACEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-1 L LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.4 I . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5_ Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Content: Project - specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. C. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8 -1/2 by I I inches (2 15 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, through will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark tip and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.5 A General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. PROJECT MANAGENIFNT AND COORDINATION PROJECT MEETINGS 01310-2 1 1 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2, Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstr►etion conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. I. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference_ Ail participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each constntction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeling. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity tinder consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders_ e. Purchases. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 a_ Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. 1. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. S. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. W. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each constntction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeling. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity tinder consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders_ e. Purchases. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. Deliveries. g_ Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction_ t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. Y. Protection of construction and personnel. 91 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly or regular intervals as indicated in Agreement. Coordinate dales of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of f Lure activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference sliall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude Matters relating to the Work. ?. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting_ Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how constntction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. ) Review schedule for next period_ b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: I ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 i F I Ll L' LION SQUARE LODGE, NORTH Vail, Colorado 6) Access. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and Imure needs of each contractor present, including the following: ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Stairs of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION _ 5 01310 _ 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 1 1) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) 15) Field observations. RFls. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. ' 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of infon»ation for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and Imure needs of each contractor present, including the following: ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Stairs of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION _ 5 01310 _ LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. s 3. Name of Contractor. � 4. Name of Architect. I 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to filly describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, strucntral grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies. and attachments. C. Hard -Copy RFIs: CSI Form 132A Contractor Form. or approved standard i 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. s t y D. Software- Generated RFIs: Software- generated form with substantially [lie same content as indicated � above. l _ Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. r S E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven } working days for Architect's response for each RFI_ RFIs received atler 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. I I. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-6 1 ' t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado b. Requests for approval of substitutions_ c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following= 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 3. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Cons(ruction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-7 Re uest or Interpretation (RFI) PROJECT: RFI No: Initiated By: Contractor: Subcontractor: SUBJECT: Description: PROPOSED SOLUTION (By Contractor) By: Date: Description: DATE: Contract M Log Date: Log By: REPLY BY: Spec or Dwg M Anticipated Cost Change? ❑ Yes ❑ No Anticipated Time Change? ❑ Yes ❑ No RESPONSE (By Architect or Consultant) By: Date: Description: Anticipated Cost Change? ❑ Yes ❑ No Anticipated Time Change? ❑ Yes ❑ No ACCEPTANCE (By Contractor) Note: If there is a cost or time change, subsequent project documents must be issued. By: Accepted w/o Cost Change? ❑ Yes ❑ No Date: Accepted w/o Time ❑ Yes ❑ No LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule_ 4. Daily construction log. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: . Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. I. Critical activities are activities on the critical path_ They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. � I I I C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a constriction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project_ D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the nminimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. ' F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. I . Float time belongs to Owner. I CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. L Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule.. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: l . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. I. Approval of cost - loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost - loaded activities. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. f . Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD -R. and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type ofschedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer - generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. I. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTA'T'ION 01320-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total Float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. G. Daily Constntction Log: Submit upon request. H. Material Location Reports: Submit upon request. Field Condition Reports: Submit upon request or at time of discovery of differing conditions_ J. Special Reports: Submit upon request at time of unusual event. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B_ Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: I . Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, and interim milestones.. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner- tiunished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubinittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures_ 9. Review and finalize list of constriction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. IL _ Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.5 A B COORDINATION Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each constriction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. I I CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3 1 u PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule or network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of constntclion. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." C A Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. I. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule- 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division I Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner- Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division I Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. S. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013211-4 r C Y i LdON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a. Coordination with existing construction. ' b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. ' f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. ' b. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. ' e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries_ ' h. Installation. ►. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. ' b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation_ d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. ' 8. Other Constraints: <Insert additional constraints not indicated elsewhere.> E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation tine, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. I . Refer to Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. ' 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, ' Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum_ 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. ' 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. I CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado G. H. 2.3 A. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time - impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt - chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. OW CONTRAC'TOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (ac(ivity-on -node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C_ CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time - scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Archilect's approval of the schedule. 1 1 I ri C� CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-6 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. ' C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. C. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. Ii. Work by Owner that may affecl or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer - drawn, time - scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: I . Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity_ 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays_ 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value ofactivity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-7 1 LI ON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total Float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. I . In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. in second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Logs: Prepare a daily construction logs recording the following information concerning events at Project site, but not limited to: . List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 16. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. H - Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site_ Lis[ shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. n r� 1 C� C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-8 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. I. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. I . Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-9 PART I - GENERAL SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I I LI SUMMARY LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of railure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. I . Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 working days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 20 working days for initial review of each submittal_ 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 working days for I SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. C. Name and address of subcontractor. f Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmitials shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01 .A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1_ Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. I . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. L Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Dale. C- Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). C- Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 t t t r_ P LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 1. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. 1. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. I . Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked approved from Architect's action stamp. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval from Architect's action stamp. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Acl ion Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. C. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f Wiring diagrams showing lactory- installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational ranee diagrams. i. Mill reports. ' j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. nm_ Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples_ SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3 n LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C Shop Drawings: Prepare Project - specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field - installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer- installed and field- installed wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by I I inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark tip and retain one returned copy as a Proiect Record Drawing. 1 Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Proiect site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to detennine Final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. SUMINUTTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 n 1 n r I t t t J 1 1 1 t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattem; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned_ Mark up and retain one rettumed Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space_ 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Constntction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Owner's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." 1. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design_ Include the following information in tabular form: I . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Sections) covered by subcontract. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. I. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of fine or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H_ Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturers letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents, K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. SUBIVII "rTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 1 t I F1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to ' authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: I. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 0. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. I a Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division l Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, fist of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of sof ware, if any, used for calculations. Include page members. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: T_ Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory- authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of li ctory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 1 Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7 I _ Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Reconmmendations for cleaning and protection. T_ Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory- authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of li ctory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 1 Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7 I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. S. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements_ 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria_ Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated - Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in time Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in perfonning these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION OF CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A_ Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S /ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals_ Architect will review each submittal, nmake marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8 t 1 1 [l 1 t I � �J 1 I ii I 1 u LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. "No Exception Taken ": When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. "Make Corrections Noted ": When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance_ 3. "Rejected ": When the Architect marks this action, do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. "Revise and Resubmit ": When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other M activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. S. "Submit Specific Item ": For unspecified submittals the Architect will return submittals to the sender and request specific submittals as specified or mark this action with one of the two actions above. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. ' E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 1 n SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-9 t 1 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I -GENERAL I.I SUMMARY LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. ' I. Specific quality- assurance and - control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and - control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and - control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality- Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full -size, physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full -size, physical assemblies that are constricted at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. Installer /Applicator /Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 1.3 A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requiremen(s for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertain(ies and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, (o Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A I . Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience_ Include proof of qualifications in the form of' a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: L Specification Section number and title. 2_ Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6_ Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. S. Requirements for obtaining samples. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 t it t J t 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 [7 1 Ll Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documenled according to ASTM E 548; and QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado 9. Unique characteristics of each quality- control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: . Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. l t . Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's. records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 UALITY ASSURANCE SURANCE ' A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has in resulted construction with a record of successful in- service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D_ Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successfiil in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Ll Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documenled according to ASTM E 548; and QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2_ NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. C. When testing is complete, remove lest specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor_ Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Mockups: Belore installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. Allow seven days for initial review and each re- review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstr uction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. QUALITY CONTROL 1.6 A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will hirish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform_ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 t t�J t L� fi 1 1 n f 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality- control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality- control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. I. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality- control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. ' 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality- control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality- control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. S. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. t C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality- control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for constriction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties_ Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I 1 t t i. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5_ Delivery of samples to testing agencies_ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5 1 L� LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. I . Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality- control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services_ 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and slating in each report whetter tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections_ Include the following: I . Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-6 t 1 1 t L r n t 1 t w t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. I. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractors responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality- control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-7 LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the constriction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Famish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide ": Famish and install, complete and ready for the intended use_ 1. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in constriction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its constriction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. ' REFERENCES - O]420 1 A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's REFERENCES 01420-2 f� LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872 -2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272 -0080 Available from Access Board www.acccss- board.gov ( CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293 -6498 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512 -1530 www .gpoacctxs.gov /crr /indcx.fitmi CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634.2355 ' Available from Army Corps of Engineers t Waterways Experiment Station www.wcs.army.mil DOD Department cf Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697 -6257 t Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus L (Sec FS) ' 1=ED -STD Federal Standard (Sec E'S) FS Federal Specification (215) 697 -6257 Available from Department orDelcnsc Single Stock Point w%vw.dod ssp.daps. mil Available from Gcneral Services Administration (202) 501. 1021 W %%' \v. f5s.8s3. gov Available front National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org (202) 289 -7800 FTMS Federal 'test Method Standard (See FS) ICC -ES ]CC Evaluation SCrViee. Inc. (800) 423-0587 ww'w.icc- cs.org (562) 699 -0543 t MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL -STD (See MILSPEC) ' MILSPF;C Military Specification and Standards (215) 697 -6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil s, ( Nf_S (Formerly: National Evaluation Service) (See ICC -1:S) I UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board (800) 872 -2253 T (202) 272 -0080 .v w w. acce ss -boa rd.gn v 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's REFERENCES 01420-2 f� LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of REFERENCES 01420-3 the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862 -5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241 -7333 www.aaadnt.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737 -0202 ww•w.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303 -5664 ww "'Aarttanct.rnne AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624 -5800 Transportation 0111cials www.transportation.org AA'FCC American Association ol'Testile Chemists and Colorists (The) (Of 9) 549 -8141 www.aatcc.or ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www•.abnta- dc.or, ACI ACl International (248) 848 -3700 (American Concrete Institute) w w•w•.ac i- int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506 -7216 www.concre te- pipc.org AE-IC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies. Inc. (The) (205) 257 -2530 www•.acic.orc AF&PA American forest & Paper Association (800) 878 -8878 w•teta.afandpa.or g (202) 463 -2700 AGA American Gas Assnefa iOtt ( 202) 824 -7000 w�cw•.a�'a.orc AGC Associated Gencrtl Contractors of America (The) (703) 148-3118 w ww.aec.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manulacturets (202) 872 -5955 ww w.ahalomrg AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288 -4960 wtvw.asphahinst itulr.org AIA American Institute ol'Architects (The) (800) 242 -3537 www .a ia.nrg ( 202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute ul'Stccl Construction (800) 644 -2400 wwtr.a i sc.orl -' ( 312) 670 - 2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 45 -7100 ww•tr.steel.or!_1 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9 i S9 REFERENCES 01420-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado www.aitc- glulam_org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395 -2522 www.alce.org (703) 736 -9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972 -1700 www.aisc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International. Inc. (847) 394 -0150 www.ainca.org ANSI American National Standards Institutc (202) 293 -8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522 -1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565 -6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454 -6989 www.urchprecast.org API American PC1r01Cant Institute (202) 682 -8000 www.api.org ARI Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institwc (703) 524 -8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207 -0917 www.asphallroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineer (800) 548.2723 tvww.ascc.org (703) 295 -6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating. Refrigerating and (800) 5274723 Air - Conditioning rrrgincers www.aslirac.org (404) 636 -8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843 -2763 (The American Society of mechanical En-ginecrs International) (212) 591 -7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835 -3040 www.asse- plumbing.org ASTM AS'fM International (610) 832 -9585 (American Society for Tc.un_ and Materials International) www.aslimore A WC) AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association ofthe Wall and Ceiline Industries International) wwtv.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manulodurcr Association (Now WCSC) AW1 Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449.8511 net. ore (703) 733 -0600 AWPA American Wood - Preserver,' Association (334) 874 -9800 tv%vw.a%vpasom A WS American Welding Socicty (800) 44-9 www.aws.org (305) 443 -9353 A\\ WA American Water Works Association (800) 926 -7337 wAvw.awwa.org (303) 794 -7711 BHMA Guilder Hnrdwarc Mantlaclincr Association (212) 297 -2122 REFERENCES 01420-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado www.buildershardware.com RIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620 -0010 www.bia,org BICSI BICSI (813) 979.1991 www.bicsi.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285 -3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (773) 761 -4100 www.bissc,org Cast Stone Institute (770) 972 -3011 www.caststone.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637.1312 www.carpe(cushion.org CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232 -3282 www.copper.org (212) 251 -7200 CL•A Canadian Electricity Association (61 3) 230 -9263 www.canclect.ca/connections CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241 -7333 wwtv.chctnica I fabricsand fi I m.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788 -2700 www.cg2ne1.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665 -2472 W3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956 -0425 LIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881 -2462 www.ccltulose.org (937) 222 -2462 CISCA Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584 -1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (433) 892 -0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301)596.2583 www.chainlinkinro.org CPA Composite Panel Association ( 301) 670 -0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Convgated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510 -2772 www.cpp.i- info.org ( 202) 462 -9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (Thc) (800) 882 -8846 www.carpet- rug.com ( 706) 278 -3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel institute (847) 517 -1200 ww'w.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463 -6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747 -4000 o'wu'.csa- internationa I,org C'S1 Construction Specilications Institute (The) (800) 689 -2900 www- csinet.org (703) 684 -0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820 -7700 www.cedarburean.org REFERENCES 01420-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583A087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower institute) .vww.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222 -2010 www.dlii.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907 -7500 www.cia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294 -3462 www.eima.com (770) 968 -7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548 -2723 www.asce.org (703) 295 -6300 EIMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332 -0040 wtvw ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339 -6937 www.csda.0rg FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241 -7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitutc.org FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.(iba.cont FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.livb.ch FM Factory Mutual System (Now FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275 -3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fntclobal.com I'RSA Florida Rooline. Sheet Metal S Air Conditioning Contractors Association. Inc_ (407) 671 -3772 www.11oridarool . com FSA Fluid Scaline Association (6 10) 971 -1850 waw. fluff dsealine.cum FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 GA Gypsum Association (202) 289 -5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271 -0208 www.glasswebsite.com GKl (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872 -6400 www.erccuscal.or_ GS1 Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522 -8440 %% ww.eeosym he[ ic- institute.orL HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786 -7744 www.pumps•orc (973) 267 -9700 HI Hydronics htstitute (908) 464 -8200 www.eamanct.orc REFERENCES 01420-6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435 -2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory_ Inc. (410) 838 -6550 www.hpwhitc.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation 441 -24 223 -4904 www.intbadfed.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830.0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827 -0830 www•.icri.org IEC International Electroiechnicei Commission 4122 919 02 11 ww•w.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Inc. (The) (212) 419.7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248 -5000 ww•w•.icsna.org IGCC Insulaline.Glass Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 ww•wJgcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233 -1510 www.iginaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of Amcrica. Inc. (812) 275 -0426 www.iliai.aont ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 ww w•. iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567 -8150 www.i55111.ne1 ITS lonenek (800) 345 -3851 w•w w•.intcrtck.cum (607) 753-6711 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 w•w•w.ilu.int/homc KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264 -1690 ww•w.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now pan of CPA) LP1 Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488 -6864 ww•w.li_hntinL_.org (847) 577 -7200 M13MA Metal Building M:muractorcrs Association (216) 241 -7333 www.ntbnto.cont MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847)480'7138 www•.maplcl7aor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 ww•w•.ntctal frauinamfg.org MH Material Handling REFERENCES 01420-7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry ofAmerica (800) 345 -1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250.9222 www.marble -insti tute.com MPl Master Painters Institute (888) 674 -8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardisation Society of The Valve and (703) 281 -6613 Fillings Industry Inc. www.mss- hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (3 12) 332 -0405 www.naamni.org NACE NACE International (281) 228 -6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nacc.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737 -2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213 -7193, ext. 453 www.aahperd.orglnagwst NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684 -0064 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557 -2848 www.nbgga.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (3 17) 917 -6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713 -1900 w'ww'.ncomorg NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248 -9094 tvww.ncpi.ora NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775 -3550 wwwmclaxom NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301 ) 977 -3698 www.nebb.ora NECA National Electrical Contractors Association ( 301) 057-3110 wwwmecanet.org NCLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829.6901 www.nehma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 541 -3200 wwwmema.org NETA InicrNational Electrical Testing Association (30;) 697 -5441 w ww.netaworld.org NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972 -6900 www•.n Ihs.ore NFPA NFPA (800) 344 -3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770 -3000 www NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589 -1776 REFERENCES 01420-8 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado wtv.r.n frc.org NGA Nationat Glass Association (703) 442 -4890 www.glass.org NNLA National hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933 -0318 wwwmadhardwood.org (901) 377 -1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524 -2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526 -5016 ww•w.nornta.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323 -9545 www.nrcamel (847) 299 -9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846 -7622 www.nnnco.org (301) 587 -1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673 -6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769.8010 www.nsforg NSSGA National Stone. Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342 -1415 tvwtv.nssga.org (703) 525 -8788 NTMA National Terrazzo& Mosaic Association. Inc. (800) 323 -9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751 -0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NW %VDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) 0I Omega Point Labonlnrics. Inc. (800) 966 -5253 m- %%'w.opl.con1 (210) 635.8100 PC] Precast /Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786 -0300 www PDCA I'aimine & Decorating Contractors nl'Amcrica (800) 332 -7322 wwWTdca.com (314) 514 -7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589 -8956 www.pdiontinc.org (978) 557 -0720 1'6I PVC Gcomembtane Institute (2 17) 333 -3929 h11P://pgi-1P.CeAJhic.edu PTI Post - Tensioning Institute (602) 870 -7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Su nctural Connections (800) 644 -2400 www.bollcouncil.org (3 R) 670 -2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340 -8530 www.rrei.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225 -7339 www.calredwood.ore (415) 382 -0662 RT1 (formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Mmudacnuer5 Association) (Now TRI) SAG SAE International (724) 776 -4841 ww".S;tc.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462 -1930 RFFFRENCES 01420-9 LION SQUARE LODGE NOR7 Vail, Colorado www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899.0010 wwwsteeldoonorg SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294 -5424 www.scralabs.coni SEI Structural Engineering Institute (800) 548 -2723 www.seinstitute.cotn (703) 295 -6195 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703)683.2075 www.siaonJine.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) Sil Steel Joist Institute (843) 626 -1995 www.stccljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533.0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Conti-actors' (703) 803 -2980 National Association www.snnacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523 -6154 (Formerly: SPI /SPED - The Society of the Plastics Industry. Inc.: Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pinc Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434 -2611 www.spib.org SPI /SPED Society of the Plastics Industry. Inc. (The) Spray P0lyure1h1nc Foam Division (Now SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781) 647 -7026 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) tvww.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982 -0355 www.ssina.cutn (202) 342 -8630 SSPC SS PC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281 -7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281.2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438.8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216)241.7333 www.swulwindows.com SWRI Sealant. Waterproofing. C Restoration Institute (816)472.7974 www.swrionlinc.om TCA Tile Council of America. Inc. (864) 646 -8453 www.tilcusa.com TIA /EIA TeICCmmm Lin icalions Indusuy Assoc iation/FILcironic (703) 907 -7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline. ore REFERENCES 01420- 10 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939 -9700 www.masonrysocicty.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833 -5900 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405 -8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705.9898 TRI Tile Roofing Institute ( 312) 670 -4177 (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.lileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285 -4476 www.ul.com (847) 272 -8800 UNI Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243 -3902 www.uni- bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786 -5539 www.usavolicyball.org (719) 228 -6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828 -7422 tvww.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology. Inc. (800) 938 -7488 www.usiu.org (31 S) 463 -6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (300) 424 -2869 www.wastec.org (202) 2444700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283 -1486 www.wclib.org (503) 634 -0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) \VCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506 -4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (2 12) 661 -4261 Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800)'' -23 -2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299.5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com Wl Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Wrx,dwork InSlitHIC of California) (916) 372 -9943 www.wicno.org WIC Woodwork Institute ofCalifomia (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Produces Association (800) 550 -7889 www.wmrmpa.com (5 30) 661.9591 WSRCA Western States Rool+ng Contractors Association 1800) 725-03 www.wsrea -corn (650) 548 -0112 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224 -3930 www.wwpa.ore C Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and updo -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. REFERENCES 01420-11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado BOCA BOCA International, Inc REFERENCES 01420- 12 (See ]CC) CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ]CC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472 -4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO Intemational Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See )CC -ES) ICC International Code Council (703) 931 -4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org ]CC -ES ]CC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423 -6587 www.ice- es.org (562) 699 -0543 NES National Evaluation Service (See ]CC -ES) SBCC] Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Arnly Corps of Engineers www.usace.arnly. mil CPSC Consumer Product safety Commission (800) 633 -2772 (301) 504 -6816 DOC Depanorem of Commerce (202) 482 -2000 w'w' \\'.l'mt111le rCe, In \' DOD Depanment of Delcnse (215) 697 -6257 w\vw'.dodssp.daps. m it DOE Depanment of Encrgy (202) 586 -9220 \e\\'\v.crcn.doc.gov EPA Enviromnental Protection Agency ` (202) 272 -0167 \\' \l'\\'. cpa, go\' FAA Federal A, iation Administration (202) 3664000 w\v\v.faa.goc FCC Federal Colnntunications C'onnnissian (888) 225-5322 FDA Food anti Drug Administration (888) 463 -6332 n'\vw•.fda.euv GSA General Scr\'iccs Adminwiation (800) 488.3111 \v\vw'.esa.eoc (202) 501 -1N88 REFERENCES 01420- 12 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975.6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321 -6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693 -1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Officc of Public Health and Science (202) 690.7694 hitp: /Iphs.os.dhhs.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720 -9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647 -4000 www.statc.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334 -2934 www.nas.edtMrb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720 -2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268 -2000 www.usps.com PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (No( Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420-13 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PARTI - GENERAL t .l SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3_ Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water Service: Water from Owners existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for constriction operations. F. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for constriction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for constriction personnel. I TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 � I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. B. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch (50 -mm), 0.148 -inch- (3.76 -mm -) thick, galvanized steel, chain - link fabric fencing: minimum 6 feel (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2- 3 /8 -inch- (60 -mnr -) OD line posts and 2 -7/8 -inch- (73 -mm -) OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -5/8 -inch- (42 -mm -) OD top rails. C. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch (50 -nun), 9 -gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 in) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2 -3/8 -inch- (60 -mm -) OD line posts and 2 -7/8 -inch- (73 -mm -) OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -5/8 -inch- (42 -mm -) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." E. Gypsum Board; Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 nun) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths: regular -type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. F. Insulation: Unlaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame- spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Fumish and equip offices as follows: I. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 1` i i r LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals_ Provide electrical power service and 120 -V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than I receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 -foot- (1.2 -m -) square tack board_ 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 Ix) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, famished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self - contained, liquid- propane -gas or ftiel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control- 1. Use of gasoline - buming space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequalely and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by aulhorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION i A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service_ I . Arrange with utility company. Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interripted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. I . Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G H Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2_ Install lighting for Project identification sign. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone members. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 1 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use when away from field office_ Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common -use facilities. Provide DSL in primary field office. 3.3 I" SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION General: Comply with the following: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 u 1 r t 1 e 1 1 i LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines_ Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits as approved. f Provide dust - control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. 1 I J Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities_ 2. Maintain access for fire- fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properlies nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. . Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2_ Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste - collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Floists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 1 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct constriction in ways and by methods that comply with environnmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects_ TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 C. D. 1 E. 1 1 F 1 1 G. 1 I J Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities_ 2. Maintain access for fire- fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properlies nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. . Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2_ Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste - collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Floists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 1 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct constriction in ways and by methods that comply with environnmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects_ TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation- control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. Pest Control: Engage pest - control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. I. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to t accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations ofauthorilies having jurisdiction. I _ Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood -plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well - drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other constriction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulale temporary enclosures. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 u LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire- exposure areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire- prevention and - protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire- protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project - identification -sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion_ E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent constriction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner ' reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2 Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate till that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil_ Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during constriction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." I END OF SECTION 01 500 I TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7 J LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN I A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION I. 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION I A_ General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division I Section "Temporary f=acilities and Controls' for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a wasle management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. I . Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on -site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities_ I . Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524-2 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANACEMENT 01524-3 w LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1 1.2 I t I 1, DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. I. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility_ Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturers product is named and accompanied by the words "Basis -of- Design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, fiunction, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractors Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. I PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C, Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h_ Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements_ At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. tt Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I . Substitution Request Fonn: Use facsimile of form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research /evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. L Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0600 - 2 U t LJ t t I [I Ll 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Contractors waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instnictions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. I PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'T'H Vail, Colorado 14 1.6 A Storage: I . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. S. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. PRODUCT WARRANTIES Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 0 Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project - specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. Flt Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation_ Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 n 11 t t r s I f t r n I ,q � 1, LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "Basis -of- Design" or "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved similar" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available M anti facturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. S. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture From manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase. Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items_ PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-5 !1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed, or the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9_ Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications_ Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 I PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6 ii t I r--1 u Ll e e SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request, applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a detailed description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature For Use by the design consultant Firm [ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as noted Address [ ] Not Accepted [ ] Received too late Dale _ Telephone Allachments: Date Remarks e LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: I. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Coordination of Owner - installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. b. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. B_ Related Sections include the following: 1. Division t Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures' for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner - accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location ofinechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. _ Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed_ Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water- service piping; and underground electrical services. ' Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation PREPARATION tolerances and other conditions A. affecting performance. Record observations. I. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. ' c_ List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify construction, verify dimensions of other constriction by field measurements before fabrication. compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by constriction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other constriction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENT'S 01700-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. ' D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by ' Architect. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. ' 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. ' 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in ' applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. ' E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral ' anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry_ Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 1. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. EXECUTION REQUIREMENT'S 01700-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.5 OWNER- INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces_ ' Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction ' progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's constntction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING 1 A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning I for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfiilly. 1 _ Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. ' 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas .-here work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper ' execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacumn the entire work , area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion_ , G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into xvater�vays will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect constriction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 , r LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise constriction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: if a factory- authorized service representative is required to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes_ Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair_ D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-5 � I � I � I I I � I � I � I � I �1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B_ Related Sections include the following: I. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 2. Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated construction_ 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: List services /systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services /systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services /systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original stricture. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of culling and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load - carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire - suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7_ Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: I. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3_ Exterior curtain -wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration- control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace constriction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. W WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by melhods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A 91 General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. t C! r. 0 7 J CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 1_1 1 J F1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in -place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in -place constriction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining constriction. if possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. ' I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. ' 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture ' or other foreign mater after cutting. G. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch constniction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing tip, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a_ Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces_ 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -4 i� 1 I� 1 1 11 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division I Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 6. Divisions 2 through lb Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1, Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion constriction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information_ 6_ Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel ofchangeover in security provisions. 8_ Complete slartup testing of systems. 9_ Submit test /adjust balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting_ 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion_ On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest - control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection_ Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. I. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual watts, floors, equipment, and building systems_ 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name_ b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 t t 11 II ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations_ B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: ' a_ Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I S WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. ' C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1 /2 -by -1l -inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations_ B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: ' a_ Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 F�� LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. I) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o_ Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 t � I t iJ t t t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: I. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: I . Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: I . Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked -up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later_ b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-1 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2_ Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits_ f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. nt. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross - reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing, include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints_ Place transparencies in durable tube -type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 4_ Identification: As follows: a. Project name_ b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d_ Name of Architect. C. Name of Contractor_ 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -2 1 t 11 u fj LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready For continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during nonnal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -3 I SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1- GENERAL 1 1 " LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: I. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.4 COORDINATION A_ Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory- authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information famished by representatives and prepare manuals. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: . Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross - reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. Binders: Heavy -duty, 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8- 1 /2 -by -I [-inch (215 -by- 280 -mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple- volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross - referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective PIastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8- 1 /2 -by -I 1 -inch (215 -by- 280 -nmm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-2 t F1 1 t 1 1 n LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: I. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6_ Water outage. 71 System, subsystem, or equipment failure. S. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I . Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: I . System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs_ 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates_ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-3 t L ION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9_ Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break -in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color - coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: I. Product name and model number_ 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: I. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-4 t [1 1 I Ll u t �J_ t t t 11 1 I 1 1 1 r J 1 s 1 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services_ F. Warranties and Bonds: include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. I . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4_ List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: I. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard lime allotment. I. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and Iocal sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. I OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system_ 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division I Section "Project Record Documments." F. Comply with Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance docunmentation. END OF SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-6 1 t t t t LJ J t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02080 - UTILITY MATERIALS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following utility materials and methods to complement other Division 2 Sections: I. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems_ 2. Concrete base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 5. Field - fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 6. Utility piping demolition. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 2 piping Sections. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the individual utility provider and the town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. 3. PE: Polyethylene. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices. B. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports, and anchorage for utility piping materials and equipment. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of utility equipment and materials in relation to other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate whether sequence and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve -stem movement. 2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance. 4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details. 5. Building, exterior wall, and foundation penetrations. 6. Sizes and location of required concrete bases. 7. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment during construction. 8. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors and walls, and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating compliance of welding procedures and personnel with requirements specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article of this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS DI.I, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. D. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be fiimished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. If larger equipment is approved, no additional costs will be approved for these increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight_ Support to prevent sagging and bending. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-2 F� i1 1 G' t Ci t L! 1� t t 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate equipment installation with other components. B_ Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. D. Coordinate connection of piping systems with other exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. E. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 2 Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe- Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. I. ASME B1621, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch (32 -mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges_ b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA Cl 10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent [in and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead content. 2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent [in and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 3_ Alloy HA: Tin - antimony - silver- copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content_ UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F G H 3 K. 2.3 A 4. Alloy HB: Tin - antimony - silver- copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. BCuP Series: Copper - phosphorus alloys. 2_ BAgI: Silveralloy. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. Solvent Cements: Manufacturers standard solvent cements for the following: I. ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493. 3_ PVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. ABS to PVC Plastic Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. Flanged, Ductile -Iron -Pipe Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA Cl 10, rubber gasket, carbon -steel bolts and nuts. Couplings: Iron -body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain -end, pressure pipes. I. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA CI If. 5. Finish: Enamel paint. PIPING SPECIALTIES Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types; and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material. Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig (1035 - or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric - Flange Insulation Kits: Field- assembled, companion -flange assembly; full -face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300 -psig (1035- or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling; with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-4 t 1 t 1 fl Ll 1 t r ` F. Pressure - Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent- adhesive, color- coded, pressure - sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A 13.1. Plastic Duct Markers following color - codes: Green: Cold air. I UTILITY MATERIALS Manufacturer's standard color -coded laminated plastic. Comply with the 112080-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple; with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). B. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations through exterior building walls are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239 -inch (0.6 -mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint_ 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated. 4_ PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 5. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 6. PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup - shaped, smooth outer surface; with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 2 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category. B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened to equipment. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. 2. Location: An accessible and visible location. C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but at least I -1/4 -inch- (30 -mm -) high letters for ductwork and at least 3/4 -inch- (19 -min -) high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. I. Material: Fiberboard. 2. Material: Brass. 3. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior -type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. 4. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A 13.1 for colors. D. Snap -On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color- coded, complying with ASME A 13.1. r ` F. Pressure - Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent- adhesive, color- coded, pressure - sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A 13.1. Plastic Duct Markers following color - codes: Green: Cold air. I UTILITY MATERIALS Manufacturer's standard color -coded laminated plastic. Comply with the 112080-5 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Yellow: Hot air. 3. Yellow /Green or Green: Supply air. 4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. 5. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Nomenclature: Include the following: a. Direction of airflow. b. Duct service. C. Duct origin. d. Duct destination. e. Design cubic feet/minute (Liters /second). G. faq Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type 1, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic- resin - laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. I . Fabricate in sizes required for message. 2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification. 3. Punch for mechanical fastening. 4. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 6. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. em) or 8 inches (200 mm) long; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units. 7. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless -steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color -coded laminated plastic. Comply with the following color- codes: I . Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Yellow /Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. 4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above. 6. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A 13.1. 7. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. C. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and revolutions /minute. 8. Size: Approximate 2 -1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches (1 15 by 150 nvn) for equipment. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation /maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that indicates individual system number and service. 2.5 GROUT UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-6 1 1 r it 1 1 t t t t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, dry, hydraulic - cement grout; nonstaining; noncorrosive; nongaseous; and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 prig (34.5 MPa), 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 2 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C_ Install piping at indicated slopes. D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping free ofsags and bends. F. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal nuns are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to pennit valve servicing. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 1. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. K. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic removable sleeves. L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Division 2 Sections for roughing -in requirements. N. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping Sections: L Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube "; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 4. Soldered Joints: Constnuct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 5. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-7 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 6. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 7. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full 1D. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading is specified. C. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with corroded or damaged threads. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 8. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 9. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. 10. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. b. ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. C. CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. d. PVC Plastic, Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672. C. PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855. f ABS to PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138. ME It. Plastic Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657 procedures and manufacturer's written instructions. a. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. b. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: I. Install unions, in piping 2 -inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2 -inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2 -1/2 -inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-8 1 n Ll 1 1 t t t t 1� I P_j 1 s 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Owner's Representative. B. Install equipment level and plumb. C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. D. Install equipment giving right of way to piping systems installed at required slope. 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. 3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. Near each valve and control device. b. ' Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. C. Near locations if pipes pass through walls or floors, or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. I . Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 -inch- (6.35 -mm -) high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. 3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint. B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: I . Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic - enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust- inhibitive metal primer. 2. Galvanized -Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic - enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer. I UTILITY MATERIALS 02080-9 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic - enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust - inhibitive metal primer. C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory- applied finish. D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (150 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 psig (20.7 MPa), 28 -day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section, "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor utility piping materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor utility materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 DEMOLITION A_ Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified in Division 2 Sections. B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe in its entirety_ D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish. E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site. F_ Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. UTILITi MATERIALS 02080-10 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for utility piping installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink grout for equipment- support bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment support plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions_ B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout. E. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. F. Place grout around anchors. G. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 02080 UTILITY MATERIALS 02080- 11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1 t 1 SECTION 02085 - INTERCEPTORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. [Authority having jurisdiction's standard] [Cast -in- place] concrete grease interceptors. 2. Cast -iron or steel oil interceptors. 3. [Authority having jurisdiction's standard] [Cast -in- place] concrete sediment interceptors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A_ Product Data: For each type of metal [oil] [and] [sediment] interceptor indicated. Include materials of fabrication, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, operating characteristics, size and location of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each type and size of precast concrete interceptor indicated. Include materials of construction, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, location and size of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. GREASEINTERCEPTORS A. Grease Interceptors: Cast -in- place- concrete or precast concrete structure complying with requirements of <lnsert authority title >. B. Grease Interceptors: Precast concrete complying with ASTM C 913. Include rubber - gasketed joints. [vent connections, ]manholes, compartments or baffles, and piping or openings to retain grease and to permit wastewater flow. INTERCEPTORS 02085- 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Structural Design Loads: a. Light- Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -8 (ASSHTO HS 10- 44). b. Medium -Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -12 (ASSHTO HS15 -44). C. Heavy - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44). d. Walkway Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -03. 2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: AS I ( 023 (ASTM C 9231.1), cast or fitted into interceptor walls, for each pipe connection. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 6I5M, deformed, I r2 2 -inch t 13 -rnm ) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on I step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -nnr) intervals. Omit steps if total depth frotn floor of interceptor to finished grade is less than [6(I inches (1500 mm)] <Insert other >. 4. Grade Rings: Reinforced- concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225-min) total thickness, to snatch diameter of manhole frame and cover. 5. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by it) 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with ( 100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. a. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536, Grade 6040 -18, unless otherwise indicated. b. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 35, unless otherwise indicated. C. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "[INTERCEPTOR] [GREASE INTERCEPTOR] [SANITARY SEWER] <Insert other >." C Grease Interceptor Capacity and Characteristics: I. Length by Width by Depth: <Insert values.> 2. Number of Compartments: [One] [Two] <Insert other >_ 3. Retention Capacity: <Insert value.> 4. [Inlet and ]Outlet Pipe Size: <Insert value.> a. Centerline of Inlet to Floor: <Insert value.> b_ Centerline of Outlet to Floor: <Insert value.> 2.3 A 5. Trapped Outlet Required: [Integral] [No] [Yes]. 6. Vent Pipe Size: [Not required] <Insert value >. 7. Installation Position: [Top flush with grade] [Underground with manhole riser to grade] <Insert other >. OIL INTERCEPTORS Oil Interceptors: Factory - fabricated, cast -iron or steel body; with removable sediment bucket or strainer, baffles, vents, and flow - control fitting on inlet. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Enpoco Div.; Watts Industries, Inc. INTERCEPTORS 02085-2 fl t Ll 1 fl 1 1 t l n t 1 r LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. d. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc. e. Schier Products Company_ f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. g. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. h. Waterlink, Inc. i. Watts Industries, Inc. j. Zum Specification Drainage Products; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Inlet, Outlet, Vent, and Waste -Oil Outlet Piping Connections: Hub, hubless, or threaded, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Extension: Cast -iron or steel shroud, full size of interceptor, extending from top of interceptor to grade. 4. Cover: Cast iron or steel, with steel reinforcement to provide ASTM C 890, [A -03, walkway] <Insert other> load. 5. Waste -oil storage tank and piping are specified in Division 2 Section "Fuel Oil Distribution." B. Oil Interceptors: Plastic body; with removable sediment bucket or strainer, baffles, vents, and flow - control fitting on inlet. I . [Available ]Manufacturers for FRP Units: a. Proceptor Div.; Green Turtle Technologies, Ltd. b. Waterlink, Inc. C. <Insert manufacturer's name.> d. [Available ]Manufacturers for PE or HDPE Units: 1) Schier Products Company. 2) Town & Country Plastics, Inc. 3) <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Inlet, Outlet, Vent, and Waste -Oil Outlet Piping Connections: Hub, hubless, or threaded, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Extension: Plastic shroud, full size of interceptor, extending fi top of interceptor to grade. 4. Cover: Plastic[ with steel reinforcement to provide ASTM C 890,] [A -03, walkway] <Insertother> load. 5_ Waste -oil storage tank and piping are specified in Division 2 Section "Fuel Oil Distribution." C. Oil Interceptor Capacity and Characteristics: I. Capacity: [Not applicable] <Insert value.> 2. Overall Dimensions: <Insert values.> 3. Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size: <Insert value.> a. Centerline of Inlet to Floor: <Insert value.> b. Centerline of Outlet to Floor: <Insert value.> INTERCEPTORS 02085-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4. Waste -Oil- Outlet Pipe Size: <Insert value.> a. Centerline of Outlet to Floor: <Insert value.> i 5. Trapped Outlet Required: [Integral] [No] [Yes]. 6. Vent Pipe Size: <Insert value.> 7. Installation Position: [Top flush with grade) [Underground with extension to grade). 8. Waste -Oil Storage Tank: [Not required] <Insert value >. 2.4 SEDIMENT INTERCEPTORS A. Sediment Interceptors: Cast -in- place- concrete or precast concrete structure complying with requirements of <Insert authority title. B. Sediment Interceptors: Precast concrete comply with ASTM C 913. Include rubber- gasketed joints, vent connections, manholes, compartments or baffles, and piping or openings to retain grease and to permit wastewater flow. 1. Structural Design Loads: j a. Light - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -8 (ASSHTO HS 10- 44). b. Medium - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -12 (ASSHTO HS 15-44). C. Heavy Traffic Load. Comply with ASTM C 890, A -] 6 (ASSHTO HS20 -44). d. Walkway Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -03. 2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ;SST \ 1 CO2 (ASTM (.' 923VI), cast or fitted into interceptor sidewalls, for each pipe connection. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 6I5M, defonned, i 113 -mtn steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on I step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to I(1 -inch (00- to =100 -rim) intervals. Omit if steps total depth from floor of interceptor to finished grade is less than [60 inchc' (14 mm)] <Insert other >_ 4. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, O- to �;(t- to ?15 - mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 5. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -min) ID by 7- to 9 -inc'a ( 175- to '2� -m;nl riser with 4 - inch - ( 100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 2()-inch- (6n0 -mm -1 diameter cover. a. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, unless otherwise indicated. b. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 35, unless otherwise indicated. C. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to the following: I} Sediment Interceptors in Sanitary Sewerage System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [SEDIMENT INTERCEPTOR] [SANITARY SEWER] <Insert other >." 2) Sediment Interceptors in Storm Drainage System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [SEDIMENT INTERCEPTOR] [STORM SEWER] <Insert other >." INTERCEPTORS 02085 -4 2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE RISERS A. Precast Concrete Manhole Risers: :'.ti 1 `,i ( .T" > (AST14 C =178)4), with rubber - gasket joints. B. Precast Concrete Manhole Risers: ASTM C 913, [30 - iuch (915 -mur)] <Insert other> ID. Include rubber - gasketed joints. I . Structural Design Loads: a. Light - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -8 (ASSHTO HS10- 44). b. Medium -Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -12 (ASSHTO HS15 -44). C. Heavy - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44). d. Walkway Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -03. 2. Length: From top of underground concrete structure to grade. 3. Riser Sections: �­ ;,;c : C-� mm i minimum thickness and (915 -min)] <Insert other> diameter. 4. Top Section: Eccentric cone, unless otherwise indicated. Include top of cone to match grade ring size. 5. Gaskets: ',. i":i (_ X13 (1STNI ('443M), rubber. 6. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, t 1 1 -mmi steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow INTERCEPTORS 02085-5 I I L ION SQUA LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 6. Cast Ferrous Gratings: Frame and [flat grate with small- square or short slotted drainage openings] <Insert other >. a. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40 -18, unless otherwise indicated. b. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 35, unless otherwise indicated. C. Minimum Size: [24 l.nv 24 inches (610 by 61.0 uun)] <Insert other >, unless otherwise indicated. d. Free Area: Approximately [50] <Insert other> percent, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Steel Gratings: Steel frame and welded heavy -duty steel grating with galvanized finish. Refer to Division 5 Section "Gratings." C. Sediment Interceptor Capacity and Characteristics: 1. Length by Width by Depth: <Insert values.> 2. Number of Compartments: [One] [Two] <Insert other >. 3. Retention Capacity: <Insert value.> 4. [Inlet and ]Outlet Pipe Size: <Insert value.> a. Centerline of Inlet to Floor: [Not required] <Insert value.> b. Centerline of Outlet to Floor: <Insert value.> I C. Trapped Outlet Required: [Integral] [No] [Yes]. 5_ 6. Vent Pipe Size: [Not required] <Insert value >. Installation Position: [Top flush with grade] [Underground with extension to grade] [Underground with manhole riser to grade] <Insert other >. 2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE RISERS A. Precast Concrete Manhole Risers: :'.ti 1 `,i ( .T" > (AST14 C =178)4), with rubber - gasket joints. B. Precast Concrete Manhole Risers: ASTM C 913, [30 - iuch (915 -mur)] <Insert other> ID. Include rubber - gasketed joints. I . Structural Design Loads: a. Light - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -8 (ASSHTO HS10- 44). b. Medium -Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -12 (ASSHTO HS15 -44). C. Heavy - Traffic Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44). d. Walkway Load: Comply with ASTM C 890, A -03. 2. Length: From top of underground concrete structure to grade. 3. Riser Sections: �­ ;,;c : C-� mm i minimum thickness and (915 -min)] <Insert other> diameter. 4. Top Section: Eccentric cone, unless otherwise indicated. Include top of cone to match grade ring size. 5. Gaskets: ',. i":i (_ X13 (1STNI ('443M), rubber. 6. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, t 1 1 -mmi steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow INTERCEPTORS 02085-5 I I t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 - mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of interceptor to finished grade is less than [60 inches (1500 nun)] <Insert other >. C. Q Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (ISo - to 225 - mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 - mm) riser with 4 -inch- (]O0 - mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -nun -) diameter cover. 1. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536, Grade 6040 -18, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 35, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to the following: a. Grease Interceptors in Sanitary Sewerage System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [GREASE INTERCEPTOR] [SANITARY SEWER] <Insert other >." b. Oil Interceptors in Sanitary Sewerage System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [OIL INTERCEPTOR] [SANITARY SEWER] <Insert other >." C. Sediment Interceptors in Sanitary Sewerage System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [SEDIMENT INTERCEPTOR] [SANITARY SEWER] <Insert other >." d. Sediment Interceptors in Storm Drainage - System: "[INTERCEPTOR] [SEDIMENT INTERCEPTOR] [STORM SEWER] <Insert other >_" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK W 3.2 A R C. D. E. F. G. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." INSTALLATION Install interceptor inlets and outlets at elevations indicated. Install precast concrete interceptors according to ASTM C 891. Set level and plumb. Install manhole risers fi•otn top of underground concrete interceptors to manholes and gratings at finished grade. Set tops of manhole frames and covers flush with finished surface in pavements. Set tops [: .nChQS (75 mm)] <Insert other> above finish surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. Set tops of grating frames and grates flush with finished surface. Set [metal] [metal and plastic] [plastic] interceptors level and plumb. Set tops of metal interceptor covers flush with finished surface in pavements. Set tops [ 7 Z ieitc� (75 nun)] <Insert other> above finish surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. INTERCEPTORS 02085-6 J t fl 1 1 r t w LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado H. Install piping and oil storage tanks according to Division 2 Section "Fuel Oil Distribution." I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. J. Make piping connections between interceptors and piping systems. K. Identification materials and installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground interceptors. 1. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. L. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. END OF SECTION 02085 INTERCEPTORS 02085-7 1 I SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PARTI - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes excavation support and protection systems. B. Related Section: Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating and backfmlling. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design, provide, monitor, and maintain an anchored and braced excavation support and protection system capable of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and supporting sidewalls of excavations. Work includes removing excavation support and protection systems when no longer needed. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, pave- ments, and other improvements adjacent to excavation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals not required for typical open -cut excavations, provided that these excavations meet require- ments of authority having jurisdiction. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or tinder the supervision of a qualified professional engineer for ex- cavation support and protection systems_ System design and calculations must be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and ad- dresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining constriction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by excavation support and protection systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and per- form work of this Section who has specialized in installing excavation support and protection systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services for de- signing excavation support and protection systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise the preparation of data for the excavation support and protection system including drawings and com- prehensive engineering analysis that shows the system's compliance with specified requirements. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not intefftupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted in writing by the Owner's Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260-1 t 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. I. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. f 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without per- mission from Owner's Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open_ Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection sys- tems. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Project Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for in- formation only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of the subsoil conditions, tests, and re- sults of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpreta- tions or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as necessary. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, , maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Owner's Representative if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials need not be new but must be in serviceable condition. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). t C. D. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328 (ASTM A 328M) or ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M) Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 3 inches (75 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. I. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. f 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without per- mission from Owner's Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open_ Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection sys- tems. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.02 SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier piles before stating excavation. Space soldier piles at intervals indicated. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at centers indicated and secure to soldier piles. 3.03 SHEET PILING A. Install one -piece sheet piling and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than I : 120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. 3.04 TIEBACKS A. Tiebacks: Drill for, install, tension, and grout tiebacks into position. Test load- carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 3.05 BRACING A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. if nec- essary to move a brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. I. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, unless otherwise approved by Owner's Representative. 2_ Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until penuanent con - struction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.06 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to sup- port excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. I. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth as recommended by the Civil Engineer below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Repair or replace, as approved by Owner's Representative, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. END OF SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1-GENERAL I.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on- grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on- grade. 4. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility strictures. 7. Rock excavation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. I. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab -on -grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations_ 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation_ F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratitied masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding I cu_ yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot in Architect's opinion be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late - model, track - mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- wide, short -lip- radius rock bucket: rated at not less than 120 -hp EARTHWORK 02300-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado flywheel power with bucket - curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf; measured according to SAE J -1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late - model, track - mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 -hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000 -lbf breakout force; measured according to SAE J -732, H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows /2 inches. I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. 1. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: I . Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Drainage fabric. 3. Separation fabric. B. Samples: For the following: 1. 30 -lb samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on -site or borrow sources_ 2. 12 -by -12 -inch sample of drainage fabric_ 3. 12 -by -12 -inch sample of separation fabric. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: I . Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock - definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. B. Pre - excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." EARTHWORK 02300-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r SOIL MATERIALS 2.1 General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: As approved by the Soil's Engineer for intended use and specifically for the required location or purpose, reference the Geotechnical report prepared by MFG Telluride on November 2005 per ASTM D 698. C. Foundation Wall Backfill: On site soil materials as approved by the Soil's Engineer. D. Over - excavation and Recommendation Zone: As specified for structural fill E. Drainage Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, reasonably uniform size, with maximum size of 1.5 inches and not more than 5% passing a No. 200 sieve, as acceptable to the Soils Engineer. F. Bedding: The pipe shall be carefully bedded as shown in the bedding details. Provide Class "B" minimum bedding for PVC sanitary sewer pipe Class "C' minimum bedding for all other pipe except for ductile iron water pipe 1. Class B Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as the method of bedding in which the pipe is set on compacted granular material supporting the lower %z of the pipe barrel. a. Compacted Granular Material: Shall be a well graded gravelly material meeting the following requirements and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 EARTHWORK U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent Weight by passing Type l Square Mesh Sieves Type 11 3" - 90-100 1.5" - - 0.75" - 20 -90 0.375" 100 - #4 95 -100 0 -20 #16 45 -80 - #50 10 -30 - #100 2 -10 02300-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1_ #200 1 0 -2 1 0 -3- 2. Class C Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as the method of bedding in which the pipe is set on compacted granular material supporting the lower quadrant of the pipe barrel using uniform graded material as specified below U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent Weight by passing Type l Square Mesh Sieves Type II 3 " - 90 -100 1.5" - - 0.75" - 20 -90 0.375' 100 - #4 95 -100 0 -20 #l6 45 -80 - #50 10 -30 #100 2 -10 - #200 0 -2 0 -3 3. Ductile Iron Pipe Bedding: Provide either well graded sand as specified below or squeegee sand as specified below a. Well Graded Sand U.S. Standard Sieve Size Total Passing Weight by Percent 3/8" 100 No 4 70 -100 No 8 36 -93 No 16 20 -80 No. 30 8 -65 No. 50 2 -30 No. 100 1 -10 No. 200 0 -3 b. Well Graded Sand U.S. Standard Sieve Size Total Passing Weight by Percent 3/8" 100 No. 200 0 -3 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: I. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. EARTHWORK 02300-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Geotextile Fabric: As shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B_ Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. I. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is to be considered "unclassified" when using heavy duty earth - moving equipment except where rock is encountered at utility trenches (either inside or outside of building line) C. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as rock excavation. I. Intermittent drilling or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will classified as unclassified excavation. D. Rock Payment lines are limited to the following:. 1. In pipe trenches, 6' below invert elevation of pipe and 2' wider than inside perimeter of pipe but not less than 3' minimum trench width. 2. Assume no rock excavation is required for the work. If rock excavation is required at utility trenches, such work will be paid in accordance with provisions relative to changes in the work and will paid on the basis of bid unit prices. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES I EARTHWORK 02300-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. I. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work_ 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus I inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3. Over excavation and Recompaction Zone: Over - excavate existing soils from all areas of the over excavation and replacement zone as defined in subsection 2. IC, for the interior and exterior slabs - on- grades, ramps and accessible walks adjacent to the building, to a minimum depth of 4' below bottom elevations of the slabs -on- grade. Moisture condition and recompact per the requirements of this sections. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. I . Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. I . Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit or as shown on drawings. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. I. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. EARTHWORK 02300-6 1 t 11 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. I . Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris_ 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Backfill Placement: I. At areas not subject to stnictural loads, provide unclassified backfill around structures beyond 5' from foundation wall and for embankments and landscape areas with top 6" being topsoil stockpiled on site 2. For Foundation wall backfill within 5' of the building line, use over - excavated moisture conditioned and recompacted soil_ 3. Under walks, steps and pavements beyond 5' from the building line, use unclassified backfill or borrow material where additional fill is required. Under walks, steps and pavements within 5' of building line, use over - excavated moisture conditioned and recompacted soil. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfll trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. I I EARTHWORK 02300-7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than I inch or bedding material as shown on the details and required by the Owner, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade tinder pavements and slabs. 3.12 FILL A. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within optimum as determined by ASTM D698 as follows: Over- excavation/Recompaction Zone +2 to +4 a. Under interior slabs -on- grades b Under exterior slab -on -grade ADA ramp and accessible walks immediately adjacent east and south of the buildin . Upto 5' Beyond Building under -1 to +3 pavements, Walks, Steps and Strutures not included in the Over - Excavation and Replacement Zones_ Foundation Backfill: Non- Strctural -3 to +3 Areas I . Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air -dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. EARTHWORK 02300-8 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: D_ Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.15• GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: I . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus I inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus I inch to % inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. 3.16 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs -on- grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL i EARTHWORK 02300-9 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Testing Agency_ Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality - control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, ASTM D 1557, ASTM D698, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1, Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfll: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3_ Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer and every 2' above top of pipe, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.18 PROTECTION A L:' Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, ranted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.19 A. I: DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property_ Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. EARTHWORK 02300-10 1 a u t r LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02300-11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02370 - SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART I GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Temporary measures needed to control erosion and water pollution by use of berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins and/or traps, geotextiles, stone checks, hay bales, silt fences, surface roughing, mats and nets, aggregate, mulch, grasses, slope drains, and other approved measures at the locations necessary to control erosion and water pollution. Coordinate temporary pollution controls with the permanent erosion control features specified and with Stormwater Management Plan provided by the Owner. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110 2. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430 3. Earthwork: Section 02200 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Silt Fence 2. Jute Netting PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (Ibs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure ( %) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (Ibs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal /min /so 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40 -80 US Sieve CW -02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability ( %) 90 ASTM -G -26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard "r and U section weighing not less than 1.00 per linear foot_ C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14 -1 /4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370-1 s LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. 2.02 JUTE NETTING A. Heavy -woven jute mesh of a rugged construction. Made of undyed and unbleached, twisted jute fibers, having smolder resistant treatment. Provide in rolls 225' by 4' wide containing 100 square yards weighing approximately 90 pounds. 2.03 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL A. Provide gravel (2" crushed screened rock) suitable for controlling dirt and debris from leaving the site at locations as shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER BARS /INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than I%. Discharge on existing vegetated slope alternately to avoid erosion. 3.02 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or bailing wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. _ 3.03 JUTE NETTING Start jute roll at top of slope or channel and unroll down grade. Lay second strip parallel to first and allow 2" overlap. Bury top end of roll in trench, minimum 4" deep. Anchor jute roll to earth surface with stakes of 8 gauge steel, 8" long, approximately 12" apart. Staple outside edges 4' to # 10' apart and along overlap edges. Overlap end rolls by 4" and anchor securely. 3.04 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL t. Install 2" crushed screened rock to not less than 6" in depth over the area indicated for access to the site with length and width as required, length not less than 50 feet. Filter cloth shall be placed over the entire area prior to placement of stone. 3.05 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.06 FILTER BERMS /SEDIMENT POND f Field construct berms as directed by Engineer. Place washed I" to 1 -1 /2° aggregate with 2' top and 3:1 side slopes extending to bottom of channel. Berm to retain sediments by retarding and filtering runoff. Place sand on face of berm for fiiture replacement of filter material. Construct in accordance with drawings. 3.07 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370-2 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.08 MAINTENANCE Maintain, repair, and supplement all slope protection and erosion control measures as stated in all applicable permits and as directed by the Owner. END SECTION 02370 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water - distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the following: I . Water services. 2. Fire- service mains. 3. Combined water service and fire- service mains. 4. Aboveground water piping for applications other than water - service piping. B. Utility- fitmished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation. C. Related Sections 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 2. Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving." 3. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Systems." 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District and the town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the more restrictive requirements shall govern. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Fire - Service Main: Exterior fire- suppression -water piping. B. Fire - Suppression -Water Piping: Interior fire- suppression -water piping. C. Water - Distribution Piping: Interior domestic -water piping. D. Water Service: Exterior domestic -water piping. E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic_ 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic. 4. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. RTRF: Reinforced thennosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings. 7. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe. 1.4 SUBMITTALS WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Piping specialties. B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations. C. Field Quality- Control Test Reports: From Contractor. Submit pressure and leakage reports, from chlorination and bacteriologic acceptance tests D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: I. Valves. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Protective enclosures. 4. Drinking fountains. E. Record drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed water system piping and production in accordance w/ Division l requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with waterworks similar to that required for project. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of piping and specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." C. Regulatory Requirements: I. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable- water - service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire- suppression water- service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. D. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. E. Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire- service- main products. F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve supervision for fire- service -main piping for fire suppression. G. NSF Compliance: I . Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water- service piping and specialties for domestic water. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND }-HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following: WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion- 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling_ B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following: . Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew -point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. D. Deliver piping with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water main with Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: I _ Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. a_ American Cast iron Pipe b. Griffen Pipe Products Company C. Pacific States d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. ' 2.3 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS I A. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA CIS1, working pressure 150psi, Class 50, minimum wall thickness of 0.25, cement mortar lining, seal casted AWWA C104,with push-on-joint, bell- and plain- ' spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA CI 10, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA CI53, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. B. Ductile -Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile -iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball -joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. C. Ductile -Iron or Cast -iron Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile -iron or cast -iron fitting complying with AWWA CI 10 or AWWA CI53. Include AWWA CI 11, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. All fittings cement mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Rating of 250psi with mechanical or push joint. 2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS I A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper, with flared connections. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought - copper, solder- ' joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought - copper fittings if indicated. B. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder -joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. C. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball - and - socket, metal -to- metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS , A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for commonly used joining materials. B. Transition Couplings: , 1. Underground Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger. AWWA C219, metal, sleeve -type coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2. Aboveground Piping: Pipe fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends ' compatible with, piping to be joined. C. Soldering Flux: ASTM B 813, water- flushable type. D. Solder Filler Metal ASTM B 32, lead -free type with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 -4 t+ ( LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: 1. Nonferrous -Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper - tube, pressure -type, solder joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. 2. Ferrous Piping: Stainless -steel hose covered with stainless -steel wire braid; with ASME B 1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B 16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose. 2.7 CORROSION - PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008 -inch minimum thickness, tube. 2.8 HOSE - CONNECTION, BACKFLOW - PREVENTION DEVICES A. General: ASSE standard, nonremovable -type, backflow- prevention devices with ASME B 1.20.7, garden - hose threads on outlet_ B. Hose - Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with manual drain feature. Units attached to rough- bronze -finish hose connections may be rough bronze. C_ Hose - Connec(ion Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3 -gpm flow and applications with up to 10 -foot head of water back pressure. Include two check valves and intennediate atmospheric vent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping. D. Flanges, anions, keyed couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. E. Underground Water - Service Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: I . NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought - copper fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 5 and NPS 6): Use NPS 6 (DN I50) ductile -iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push -on- joint fittings; and -asketed joints_ WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction. B. Make pipe joints according to the following: I . Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water - Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 2. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire- Service -Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for piping- system common requirements. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Water -Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. B. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire- service -main piping materials and installation. I _ Install PE corrosion- protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. C. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." D. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 54 inches. E. Extend water- service piping and connect to water - supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. L Terminate water - service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems are installed. F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained -joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie -rods and clamps, and other supports. G. Anchor service -entry piping to building wall. H. See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable - water piping inside the building. L See Division 13 Sections for fire - suppression water piping inside the building. J. Install trap below frost line on drain outlet of each drinking fountain. 3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-6 I I e 11 3.7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion- resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. Pothole ahead of work to Electrician exact horizontal and vertical location of existing utilities at planned connections points. Notify Engineer of conflicts. B. Connect water - distribution piping to existing water service and new fire service line per Eagle River Water and Sanitation District requirements. C. Connect water - distribution piping to interior domestic -water and fire- suppression piping. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1 -1 /2 times working pressure for 2 hours_ 1. Increase pressure in 50 -psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for I hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for I more ' hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits. ' C. Prepare reports of testing activities. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water- service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tapes. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water- distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water - distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of fire service line piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1 Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: a. Fill system or part of system with water /chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water /chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. C. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. After completing drinking fountain installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 8 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building. B. Related Sections I. Division 2 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" 2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving." 4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Systems_" 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene - diene- monomer rubber. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure- Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. Materials and methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District and the town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the more restrictive requirements shall govern. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: I . Sewer System materials and products B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. C. Record Drawings- At project closeout submit record drawings of installed sanitary sewer piping and products, in accordance with Division I requirements_ 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. I.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530- 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH , Vail, Colorado A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. x Posthole ahead of planned crossing and connections to determine exact horizontal and vertical location of ' existing utilities. Notify Engineer of conflict. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless ' permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility r services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. S PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS. A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following: I. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for gasketed joints. a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.3 MANHOLES A. Normal- Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for robber gasketed joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 8 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5 -inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 5 -inch minimum thickness and lengths to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type, unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced- concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match 24 -inch- diameter frame and cover. 8. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. 9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile -iron castings designed for heavy- ■ duty service. Include 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch minimum width flange, and 26 -inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "SANITARY SEWER" cast into cover. ' SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-2 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.4 CONCRETE A. General: Cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: I . Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel. C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three - fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a. Invert Slope: minimum 2 percent through manhole. 2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a. Slope: 4 percent. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 400), deformed steel. 2.5 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Description: One- or two-coat, coal -tar epoxy; 15 -mil minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated; factory or field applied to the following surfaces: 1. Concrete Manholes: On interior surface. 2. Concrete Manholes: On exterior surface. 3. Concrete Manholes: On exterior and interior surfaces. 4. Manhole Frames and Covers: On entire surfaces. 5. Manhole Frames and Covers: On surfaces that will be exposed to sewer gases. 2.6 BACKWATER VALVES A. Gray -iron Backwater Valves: ASME A 1 12.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat. I. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub- and - spigot ends. 2. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub- and - spigot ends. 3. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. B. PVC Backwater Valves: Similar to ASME Al 12.14.1, horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check valve_ I I SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02S30-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.7 CLEANOUTS A. Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersunk cleanout plug. Provide round cast -iron access frame and cover with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. . Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight joints. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated. C. Gravity -Flow Piping: Use the following: 1. NPS 4 and NPS 6: PVC sewer pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints. 3.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. I. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications: a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD. b. Increaser /reducer- pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes. 3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping_ Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point, tnie to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements_ Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. C_ Use manholes for changes in direction, unless cleanouts are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-4 1 1 LJ LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install gravity -flow piping, of sizes and in locations indicated. 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, for 4" diameter service line and minimum of 1.0% for 6" diameter service line. Terminate 5' from building line shown on drawings. Place 2x4 wood marker painted green, at terminus extending form sewer invert to 2' above finishing grade. Place water tight plug in end of each service line. 2. Install piping with 54 -inch (1372 -mm) minimum cover. 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated. B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation. C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Join profile sewer pipe fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Install according to ASTM D 2321. 3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. D. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R. 3.9 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION ' A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in -place concrete block, as shown on drawings deep. Set ' with tops I inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-5 II LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- (200 -mm -) thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. 3. Fill all abandoned piping with slurry mixture designed to fill holes and breaks. "Flow -till' or approved equal. B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below: . Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches (1000 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. 3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3-11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in•piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. I . Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 2. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred_ Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter_ c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. 5. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M). 6. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. END OF SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-6 1 t t t L El t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02552 - GROUND -LOOP, HEAT -PUMP PIPING PART I - GENERAL 1-1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping for horizontal, direct - buried, ground -loop, heat -pump systems that operate between 23 and 104 deg F (minus 5 and plus 40 deg C). 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ground -Loop, Heat -Pump Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Joining method and equipment. 3. Propylene glycol solution, B. Field quality- control test reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR Numbers 5.3, 7, 9, or 11.5; with PE compound number required to achieve required system working pressure. 1. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 3261, PE resin, socket- or butt - fusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class. B. U -Bend Assembly: Factory fabricated with embossed depth stamp every 24 inches (600 mm) from U- bend. 2.2 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION A. Propylene Glycol: Minimum 99 percent propylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors and environmental stabilizer additives to be mixed with water to protect the piping circuit and connected equipment from physical damage from freezing or corrosion_ B. Quantity: Sufficient solution for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. GROUND -LOOP, HEAT -PUMP PIPING 02552-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Dilution Water: Chloride content shall be less than 25 ppm, sulfate less than 25 ppm, and hardness less than 100 ppm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, warning tape, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING INSTALLATION A. Separate trenches by 10 feet (3 m) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Remove rocks in trenches that could contact pipe. B_ Backfill to 24 inches (600 mm) above pipe with mud developed from excavated rock -free soil or with sand, pea gravel, or fly ash. Backfill from slurry level to grade with excavated soil, compacting as specified for pipe burial in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." C. Install PE piping in trenches according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM F 645. 1. Clean PE pipe and fittings and make heat - fusion joints according to ASTM D 2657. Minimize number of joints. D. Purge, flush, and pressure test piping before backfilling trenches. E. Install continuous detectable warning tape for underground piping. Locate tape a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping_ Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." F. Common piping installation requirements are specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods." 3.3 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION FILL A. Fill system with required quantity of propylene glycol and water to provide minus 30 deg F (minus 23 deg C) freezing temperature. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Fill piping 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize piping. Use potable water only. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1 -1/2 times the pipe working- pressure rating. GROUND -LOOP, HEAT -PUMP PIPING 02552-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I. Increase pressure in 50 -psig (345 -kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 30 minutes. Slowly increase to next test pressure increment and hold for 30 minutes. After testing at maximum test pressure, reduce pressure to 30 psig (207 kPa). Hold for 90 minutes, and measure pressure at 30- minute intervals. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. C. Prepare reports of testing activity. END OF SECTION 02552 GROUND -LOOP, HEAT -PUMP PIPING 02552-3 L10N SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE PART]- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1. Foundations, 2. Underslab areas. 3. Retaining walls. 4. Landscaped areas. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene. B. HDPE: High - density polyethylene. C. PE: Polyethylene_ D. PP: Polypropylene. E. PS: Polystyrene. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For drainage conduit, drainage panels, and geotextile fabrics. I. Perforated pipe. 2. Solid pipe. 3. Pipe with open joints. 4. Drainage conduits_ 5. Drainage panels. 6. Geotextile fabrics. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Drainage panel materials and installation shall be compatible with dampproofing and waterproofing of walls below grade. SUBDR 02620-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A_ Refer to various application articles in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 UNDERSLAB HEADERS A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751. 1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. B. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra -Heavy classes, hub -and- spigot ends, gray, for gasketed joints. . Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. C. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. D. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, cornugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. I . Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell - and - spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405, corrugated, for coupled joints. I. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. B. Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 667, corrugated, for coupled joints. I . Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. C. Perforated, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell- and - spigot ends, for loose joints. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-2 LION SQUARE LODGE ]NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Perforated, Clay Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 700, Standard - Strength and Extra - Strength classes, unglazed, socket - and - spigot ends, for closed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 425, rubber. E. Perforated, Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 444/C 444M, Type 1, and applicable requirements of ASTM C 14 /C 14M, Class 2, socket - and - spigot fittings. I. Gaskets: ASTM C 443/C 443M, rubber. F. Clay Drain Tile: ASTM C 4; Standard, Extra - Quality, and Heavy -Duty classes, for open joints. G. Concrete Drain Tile: ASTM C 412/C 412M; Standard - Quality; Extra- Quality; and Heavy -Duty, Extra - Quality classes, for open joints. 1.1. Open -Joint Screening: ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt - saturated roofing felt. 1. Open -Joint Screening: ASTM D 227, coal- tar - saturated roofing felt. J. Open -Joint Screening: Copper -mesh screening. K. Open -Joint Screening: Corrosion - resistant metal clips made for this application. L. Open -Joint Screening: Woven geotextile filter fabric, for a minimum total weight of 3 oz. /sq. yd. (0.10 kg /sq. m). 2.5 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS A. Description: ASTM C 1173. Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. 2.6 CLEANOUTS A. Cast -Iron Pipe: ASME AI 12.36.2M; with round - flanged, cast -iron housing; and secured, scoriated, Medium -Duty Loading class, cast -iron cover. Include cast -iron female and countersunk, brass cleanout ' plug. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. ' 2.7 DRAINAGE CONDUIT A. Pipe and Fittings: Perforated and corrugated, molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350, with fittings and geotextile filter fabric jacket. I. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with a minimum flow rate of 30 gpm per foot (62 L/s per 1000 mm). 2. Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 nun) thick with a minimum flow rate of 45 gpm per foot (93 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. ' 4_ Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band. I I SUBDRAINACE 02620-3 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. 2.8 A W C IIn E. F Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 1248 into shape of interconnected corrugated pipes, with fittings and geotextile filter fabric jacket. I . Size: 6 inches (152 mm) high by approximately 11- 114 inches (31 mm) thick with a flow rate of 15 gpm per foot (3.1 Us per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 2. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 2 -1/2 inches (64 mm) thick with a flow rate of 30 gpm per foot (6.2 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3 -3/4 inches (95 mm) thick with a flow rate of 45 gpm per foot (9.3 Us per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716, 4. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. 5. Couplings: HDPE. Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, smooth PVC complying with ASTM D 4216 and ASTM D 2729, Size: 8 inches (203 mm) high by approximately 2 -1/4 inches (57 mm) thick with a minimum flow rate equal to NPS 4 (DN 100) pipe. 2. Fittings: PVC with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet connection. 3. Couplings: PVC. MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Wick Drain Corporation. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div. 3. GREENSTREAK/Westem Textile Products. 4. Ling Industrial Fabrics, Inc_ 5. TC Mirafi. Molded -sheet drainage panels are specified in various Division 7 waterproofing Sections. Description: Prefabricated, composite panels, 36 to 60 inches (915 to 1525 mm) wide, and manufactured with geotextile facing laminated to molded- plastic drainage core. Drainage Core: Three - dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded PP or PS. I_ Minimum Compressive Strength: 15,000 Ibf /sq. ft. (718 kPa)] [18,000 Ibf /sq. ft. (862 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 1621. 2. Minimum Flow Rate: 7 gpm per foot (87 L /min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 0.1 and compressive stress of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. Geotextile: Nonwoven needle- punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyoletins or polyesters: with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: I. Survivability: Class 2. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25 - mm) sieve, maximum_ 3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum. Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyoletins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: SUBDRAINAGE 02620-4 J t I t 1 F t Ll L �1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Survivability: Class 2. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve, maximum. 3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum. G. Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface. 2.9 FABRIC DRAINAGE PANELS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Akzo Nobel Geosynthetics Co. 2. GSE Lining Technology, Inc. 3. JDR Enterprises, Inc. 4. Strata Systems, Inc. 5. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. B. Description: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, made with drainage core and filter fabric, for use as part of foundation, and retaining -wall drainage system. C. Drainage Core: Open- constntction, resilient, 0.8 -inch- (20 -mm -) thick, nylon - filament mesh. 1. Minimum Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm per foot (30 Umin. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 3600 prig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716_ D. Drainage Core: 3- dimensional, PE strand, 0.25 -inch- (6.3 -mm -) thick, nonwoven net. I. Minimum Flow Rate: 5 gpm per foot (62 Umin. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 3600 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. E. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm per sq. ft. (81 to 136 Us per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 2.10 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Diversifoam Products. 2. Dow Chemical Company (The). 3. Owens Corning. 4. Tenneco Building Products. C. Insulation drainage panels are specified in various Division 7 waterproofing Sections_ D. Description: Extnided- polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, fabricated with shiplap or tongue- and - groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels, faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado !. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu- m) minimum density and 25 -psig (173 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2.11 SOIL MATERIALS A. Impervious Fill: Clay, gravel, and sand mixture. B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing I -1/2 -inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve. 2.12 ROOFING FELTS A. ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt- saturated roofing felt. B. ASTM D 227, coal- tar - saturated roofing felt. 2.13 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A. Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates range from 110 to 330 gpm per sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L /min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. Available styles are flat and sock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backftlling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.3 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping: I . Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell -and- spigot joints. 3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra - Strength class, gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. Clay drain tile, Extra - Quality class; and open joints. 5. Concrete drain tile, Extra - Quality class; and open joints. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping: I . Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra - Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. Clay drain tile, Extra - Quality class; and open joints. 4. Concrete drain tile, Extra - Quality class; and open joints. C. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: I . Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra - Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Clay drain tile, Extra - Quality class; and open joints. 3. Concrete drain tile, Extra- Quality class; and open joints. 3.4 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A_ NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping: 1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra- Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. B_ NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping: i . Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra- Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. C_ NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: I . Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra - Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 3.5 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM HEADER APPLICATIONS A. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) Piping: I. ABS pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. B. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: 1. ABS pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. C. NPS 12 (DN 300) Piping: I. ABS pipe and Fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. I SUBDRAINAGE 02620-7 F1 LJ LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. D. NPS 15 (DN 375) Piping: 1. Cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. I. Install warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION 3.7 A. Bottom Impervious Fill: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide. B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests_ After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. Ater installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). C. Install vertical drainage panel as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this Specification. Do not install aggregate. 3. Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width. 4. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 5. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 6. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of pipe. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Some manufacturers use construction adhesives, metal stick pins, or double -sided tape. Do not penetrate waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-8 t 1 t t t F1 t r 1 I 1 )(.,ION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 7. If another panel is required on the same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core and wrap fabric over new panel. 8. If additional rows of panel are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric. 9. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade. 10. For inside comers, bend panel. For outside comers, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for overlap. 11. Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof membrane, unless otherwise approved by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. D. Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose -depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer_ Fill to finish elevations and slope away from building. 3.8 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION ' A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted, but before drainage fill has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping with drainage fill to elevation of bottom of slab and compact drainage material. 1. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. 2. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. C. Install horizontal drainage panels as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at inside edge of footings. 3. Place drainage panel over drainage pipe with core side up. Peel back fabric and wrap fabric around pipe. Locate top of core at bottom elevation of floor slab. 4. Butt additional panels against other installed panels. If panels have plastic flanges, overlap installed panel with flange. 3.9 RETAINING -WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. I. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. 2. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-9 I �, LION SQUARE LODGE NORTIi 3.10 Vail, Colorado 3. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). B. Install vertical drainage panels as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this Specification. Do not install aggregate. 3. If weep holes are used in lieu of drainage pipe, cut 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) diameter holes on core side at weep -hole locations. Do not cut fabric. 4. Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width. 5. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 6. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 7. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of wall comer. Place core side of panel , against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product. Use nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Do not penetrate D. waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer. 8. If another panel is required on the same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core and wrap fabric over new panel. 9. If additional rows of panel are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric. 10. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade. 11. For inside comers, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for overlap. 12. Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof membrane, unless otherwise approved by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fill to Grade: Place fill native material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose -depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. I �, 3.10 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Install drainage pipe with a horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over trench bottom to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. 1. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). 2. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. 3. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. C. Drainage Conduit: Provide , trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. D. Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over drainage [fill) (conduit). Place material in loose -depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer_ Fill to finish grade. SUBDRAINAGE 02620-10 I �, 1 L�� t 1 it fl 3.11 PIPING INSTALLATION LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with fiill bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent. 3. Retaining -Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping system, install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. However, when water discharges through wall weep holes, pipe may be installed with a minimum slope of zero percent. 4_ Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 5. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 6. Lay open joint pipe spaced as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, with 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) space between ends. Cover top two- thirds of joint opening with open -joint screening material and tie with corrosion- resistant wire. 7. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered frilly into adjacent bell_ B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. E. Install clay piping according to ASTM C 12 and NCPI's "Clay Pipe Engineering Manual." F. Install concrete piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Handbook." 3.12 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with ntbber compression gaskets according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings. B. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soillight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division 11, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties." C. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soillight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division 11, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties "; or according to ASTM D 2321. D. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomerie seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 _ E. Join perforated, PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose, bell- and - spigot joints. F. Join perforated, clay pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 425. G. Lay clay pipe and fittings with open joints and open -joint screening material_ I SUBDRAINAGE 02620- 11 11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado H. Join perforated, concrete pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 443/C 443M. I. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both pipe materials and dimensions. 3.13 FOUNDATION, RETAINING -WALL AND LANDSCAPING SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts from subdrainage piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping_ B. In vehicular- traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast -iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast -in -place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug flush with grade. Cast -iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular- traffic areas. C. In nonvehicular - traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast -in -place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug I inch (25 mm) above grade. 3.14 UNDERSLAB SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from subdrainage piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. B. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast -iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug flush with top of slab. 3.15 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid building storm drainage system. C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage till to top of pipe, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling_ Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory_ t F1 t 1 t SUBDRAINAGE 02620-12 1 J LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.17 CLEANING A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 02620 SUQDRAINAGE 02620- 13 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building. B. Related Sections: Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for foundation drains connecting to storm drainage. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene plastic. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure - Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. B. Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, these requirements shall govern. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Polymer- concrete, channel drainage systems. 2. Stornvater disposal systems. B. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed storm drainage system piping and products, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 C. Design Mix Reports and Calculations_ For each class of cast -in -place concrete. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS STORM DRAINAGE 02630-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. Pothole ahead of installation to determine exact horizontal and vertical location of existing utilities at planned crossings_ Notify Engineer of conflicts. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Polymer- Concrete, Channel Drainage Systems: a. ABT, Inc. b. ACO Polymer Products, Inc_ 2. NyloPlant Area Drains: As Shown on plan 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated HDPE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S. with smooth waterway for couplingjoints, G' diameter 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints. B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints, 12" diameter. I . Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints. C. Reinforced - Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76. Class III and V, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, ribber. 2.4 MANHOLES A. Normal- Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5 -inch (I00 -mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 5 -inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type, unless concentric -cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced - concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match 24 -inch- diameter frame and cover. 8. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor into base, riser, and top section sidewalls with steps at 12- to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. 9. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. 10. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 2.5 CATCH BASINS A. Normal- Traffic, Catch Basins: as shown on drawings. B. Frames and Grates: as shown on drawings 2.6 CONCRETE A. General: Cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: . Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 11. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious ratio. I . Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel. C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious ratio. I. Include channels and benches in manholes. a. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three - fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 1) Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. b. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. I ) Slope: 4 percent. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water - cementitious ratio. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 6151A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel. 2.7 POLYMER - CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer- concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated_ B. Sloped- Invert, Polymer- Concrete Systems: as shown on drawings: I. Channel Sections: Interlocking - joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4 -inch inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built -in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate, as shown on drawings 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," as shown on drawings. 2.8 PIPE OUTLETS A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone, as shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground strictures. 1 _ Use detectable waming tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below, Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated. C. Gravity -Flow Piping: Use the following: i _ NPS 4 and NPS 6: Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 2. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375): Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10. Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15. 3. NPS 15 reinforced - concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints Class III and V. Do not use nonreinforced pipe instead of reinforced concrete pipe. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings or cleanouts are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated. B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation. C. HDPE Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instntctions. 3. Install corrugated piping according to the Comigated Polyethylene Pipe Association's ' "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings_" D. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Use the following seals: s l . Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. E. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated. F. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Form continuous concretc channels and benches between inlets and outlet. T R 1S O � DRAINAGE 02630-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished grade surface of manholes. D. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891. 3.7 CATCH -BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.8 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. B. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R. 3.10 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface_ C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer_ D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. 3.11 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in -place concrete block, as shown on drawings. Set with tops I inch above surrounding earth grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed_ 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-6 I I A I t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. I. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. C. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired in accordance with Vail, Colorado requirements.. I . Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 6. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. END OF SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02630-7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02732 - ROADWAY BASE PARTI GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade prior to paving and after utility contractors have completed installation of all utilities, and furnish and place one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. All work shall be in accordance with Town of Vail requirements, Standards and Specifications. B. Related Work: 1. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430 2. Water System: Section 02510 3. Sanitary Sewer System 02530 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. 'Pest Reports: If requested, fiirnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis — ASTM C 136 2. Wear Abrasion — ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit — AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves — AASHTO T99 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 1 Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - 3" 100 95 -100 - - - 2" 95 -100 - 100 - 1- 1 /2" - 90 -100 - - I" - - 100 - 3 /a - 50 -90 - 100 No.4 30 -65 - 30 -50 30 -70 30 -65 No. 8 - - - 25 -55 No. 200 3 -15 3 -15 3 -12 3 -15 3 -12 Liquid Limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. ROADWAY BASE 02732-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95 %ASTM -698 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogenous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6 ", construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 ". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% ASTM -698. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum. END Of SECTION 02732 ROADWAY BASE 02732-2 r f LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART]- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: I . Driveways and roadways on grade 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walkways. 4_ Site walks / stairs. B. Related Sections: Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and installation methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the town of Vail. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast - furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated_ B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: 1. Aggregates.Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali- aggregate reactivity. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: L Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories_ 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4_ Admixtures. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - I [I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. 1.5 A. B. C. D. E. F 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. Field quality- control test reports. 1. All reports shall be provided to Civil and Geotechnical Engineers. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures per requirements specified on Drawings. Mockups: Cast mockups of full -size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed_ 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction_ 4. Maintain approved mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Architect. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. C. Ready -mix concrete producer. d. Concrete pavement subcontractor. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -2 J t i 1 r I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal - framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. I . Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. B. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form- release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Epoxy - Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel. D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); defomned. E. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. F. Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. H_ Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 81 1. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. J- Epoxy- Coated -Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A_ Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self - expanding cork. B. Slip- Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory- graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum -oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows: 1. Types 1V and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement- Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P -I 15, Type 1 or AASHTO M 248, Type F I . Color: As indicated.. B_ Pavement- Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P -1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. I. Color: As indicated. C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type I. 2.9 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air- entrained concrete, 2500 -psi (17.2 -MPa) minimum compressive strength, 4 -1/2 inches (I IS mm) high by 9 inches (225 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. I. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. B. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; [4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and (toles for anchoring to substrate_ . Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (I 9 -nun) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal- weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I . Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal- weight concrete to meet the Colorado Department of Transportation Class P with the following properties: I. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.5. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus I inch (25 mm). C. Limit water - soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. I . Use water - reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water - reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to AC1301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, as follows: I. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: 50 percent. F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg /cu. M). G. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116]_ Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperantre is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. I. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-7 n LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding_ 1. Completely proof -roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10 -wheel tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge fomu, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forts to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form - release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B_ Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond - reducing materials. C_ Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Zinc- Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc- coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material. F. Epoxy - Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy- coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy- coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch (50 -ntm) overlap of adjacent mats. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -8 � � 1 L� t e I I t 1 3.5 JOINTS LION SQUARE Lot)CE NORT}I Vail, Colorado A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one -half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway- section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Fomi isolation joints of preformed joint - filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than I inch (25 mm) below finished surface. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D_ Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement: I . Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3_ Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. I CEMENT CONCRF,TE PAVEMENT 02751 -9 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.6 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades (like snowmelt) to permit installation of their work. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. Take every precaution to prevent snow and ice build up on sub -base surface. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Comply with AC1 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place lop layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements_ Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. M. Slip -Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine daring operations. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -10 1 t s t F t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength. O. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACl 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. P. Hot- Weather Placement: Comply with ACl 301 and as follows when hot - weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water- soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power - driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. I. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float - finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Other Traffic Surfaces: Medium -lo- Fine - Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. 3. Sidewalks /Walkways: Medium -to- Coarse - Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float - finished concrete surface 1116 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff - bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES I A. Seeded Exposed - Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 1. Spray -apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufaclurer's written instructions. 2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 11 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon - bristle broom. 4. Fine -spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. B. Slip- Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip- resistive aggregate finish on pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread [40 lb /100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/10 sq. m) dampened slip- resistive aggregate over pavement surface in 2 applications_ Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two- thirds of slip- resistive aggregate over pavement surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second slip- resistive aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power floating. 3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip - resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate. r 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. i B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x It (1 kg /sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture- retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously vet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch (300 -mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture - Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound (to be used as indicated in soil Engineers report): Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a minimum rate of I gallon per 150 square feet. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during ' curing period. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 12 A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect and Landscape Architect B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and'dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg /L). 3.12 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one - quarter to one -third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform Geld tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: I . Testing Frequency: Obtain at least I composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or traction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive - strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used_ CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-13 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: I. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 318 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- (3 -m -) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: I inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect and Landscape Architect B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and'dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg /L). 3.12 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one - quarter to one -third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform Geld tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: I . Testing Frequency: Obtain at least I composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or traction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive - strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used_ CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-13 5. 6. LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when - onerete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less Ihan one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. - oncrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31 M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Compressive- Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive- strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C_ Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION �1 r t J n 11 t A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from danmage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 14 u e END OF SECTION 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 02751-15 ' A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. ' B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2_ When joint substrates are vet. ' B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH t Vail, Colorado SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' l . Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint- sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: If required, for each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint - sealant samples in 112 -inch- (13 -mm -) wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products fiumished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint - ' sealant installations with a record of successfiul in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. ' B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2_ When joint substrates are vet. ' B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado C. Joint - Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by ' joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. ' 2.2 COLD - APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Premoulded joint filler for expansion joints shall meet ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752. Per City Standards. B. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single- component, low- modulus, neutral- curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. C. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single- component, low - modulus, neutral - curing, self - leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL. D. Multicomponent Low- Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation consisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self - leveling sealant. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cold- applied joint sealants that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: a. Roadsaver Silicone -SL; Crafco Inc. b. 888; Dow Corning. 2. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: a. 890 -SL; Dow Corning. t 3. Mullicomponent Low - Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: a. SOF -SEAL; W.R. Meadows, Inc. ' 23 HOT- APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint ASTM DI 190. ' sealer shall meet requirements of Per City Standards. B. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single- component formulation complying with ASTM D 3406. C. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single - component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, hot - applied joint sealants that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764-2 ' LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: a. Superseal 444/777; Crafco, Inc. b_ POLY -J ET 3406; W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: a. ROADSAVER 221; Crafco Inc. b. Product 99005; Koch Materials Company. C. Product #9030; Koch Materials Company. d. SEALTIGHT HI -SPEC; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.4 JOINT - SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A: General: Provide joint - sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot - Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot - Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold- Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 2.5 PRIMERS ' A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance_ ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate tests or prior experience_ Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces_ I PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764-3 I I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. I . Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2_ Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: I . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum .sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. I . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2_ Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 02764 1 1 J 0 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764-4 ' i LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02768 - DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: t. Colored cement concrete pavement. 2. Stamped cement concrete pavement. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design mixtures. C. Material certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready- Mix- Concrete Producer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACl 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents_ C. Mockups: Cast mockups of fill -size sections (minimum 48 "x48 ") of decorative cement concrete pavement to demonstrate typical pattern, texture, surface finish, color, joints, and standard of workmanship_ D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide frill- depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768- 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. White Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 ntm) nominal_ 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water. Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. L Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. Water - Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. F. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative cement concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type 111, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. COLOR MATERIALS 2.4 A. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water- reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. B. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener: Factory- packaged dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. C. Pigmented - Powder Release Agent: Factory- packaged dry combination of surface - conditioning and dispersing agents interground with coloring pigments that facilitates release of stamp mats. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-2 i LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D_ Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard clear, evaporating formulation that facilitates release of stamp mats and texture rollers. 2.5 IMPRINTING TOOLS A. Stamp Mats: Semirigid polyurethane mats with projecting textured and ridged underside capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete. B. Stamp Tools: Open -grid, aluminum or rigid plastic stamp tool capable of imprinting joint patterns on plastic concrete. C_ Rollers: Manually controlled, water - filled aluminum rollers with projecting ridges on drum capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete_ D. Texture Rollers: Manually controlled, abrasion - resistant polyurethane rollers capable of imprinting texture on plastic concrete. 2.6 STENCIL MATERIALS A. Stencils: Manufacturer's standard moisture- resistant paper or reusable plastic stencils, designed for use on plastic concrete. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Waterborne, Membrane- Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, specifically manufactured for colored concrete. 1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by coloring admixture manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer. C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard waterbome, membrane - forming, medium - gloss, acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, specifically manufactured for colored concrete, containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume, nonyellowing, and UV resistant. D. Slip- Resistant Additive: Manufacturer's standard finely graded aggregate or polymer additive, designed to be added to clear acrylic sealer, to result in a slip - resistant surface. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties: DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02769-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): per Stnuctural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 3. Slump Limit: per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. B. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal - weight concrete at point of placement having an air content per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements.. C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb /cu. yd. (0.60 kg /cu. m) E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment or colored water - reducing admixture to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete- Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. I. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. B. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. C. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 3.2 JOINTS A. Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Constrict transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-4 n I I 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. D. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, E. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. 3.4 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISH A. Integrally Colored Concrete Finish: After final floating, apply a hand - trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete. I . Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float- finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Other Locations: Medium -to- Fine - Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float - finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. 3. Sidewalks/Walkways: Medium -to- Coarse - Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float - finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.5 PIGMENTED MINERAL DRY -SHAKE HARDENER A. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial Floating, apply pigmented mineral dry- shake materials to pavement surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 3.6 STAMPING (Patios) A. Mat Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Unifornily load mats and press into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Remove stamp mats immediately. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp mats. B. Tool Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches (75 mm), and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove air bubbles. Accurately align and place stamp tools in sequence and tamp into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Remove stamp tools DECORATIVE CEMENT RE PAVEMENT N - E ENT CONC TE PA CME T 0_76$ S LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Roller Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches (75 mm), and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove air babbles. Accurately align roller and repeat rolling operation to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Hand stamp surfaces inaccessible to roller. Unroll and remove polyethylene film immediately after roller stamping. 3.7 A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold- weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (I kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. I. Cure integrally colored concrete with a curing compound. 2. Cure concrete finished with pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener with a caring compound. 3.8 immediately. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp tools. Unroll and remove polyethylene film immediately after tool stamping. CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING SEALER 1 A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90- degrees to the direction of the first coat using same application methods and rates. 1tz-6 A. . Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than 28 days after concrete placement. 2. Mix slip- resistant additive thoroughly in sealer before application according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during application to maintain even distribution of additive. PAVEMENT TOLERANCES 3.10 Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and ACI 330.1. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace decorative cement concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or does not comply with requirements in this Section in complete sections from joint to joint, unless otherwise approved by Architect. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-6 I t [I END OF SECTION 02768 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-7 11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Pavers set in aggregate setting beds. 2. Aluminum edge restraints. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02552 — Ground -Loop Heat Pump Piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates. B. Samples of pavers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantiai Completion. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold- Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. C. Cold- Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grout: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24 hours after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PAVERS A. Unit Pavers: To be selected by Architect. UNIT PAVERS 02780-1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Straight, 118 -inch- (3.2 -mm -) thick by 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) high extruded - aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long for each loop. I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BRICKSTOP Corporation. b_ Cury -Rite, Inc. C. Permaloc Corporation. d. Sure -Loc Edging Corporation. B. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type 11. C. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A 1. 2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No.8. B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (I.18 -mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. D. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle- punched geotextile made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following: 1. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0-425 -mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity_ 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL, A_ Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. B. Cut unit pavers with motor - driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use frill units without cutting where possible. C. Joint Pattern: Random, with long edges mmning parallel to foot traffic. D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm) unit -to -unit offset from flash (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide foam filler as backing for sealant - filled joints. Install joint filler before setting pavers. UNIT PAVERS 02780-2 t r t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint Flier before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. G. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers or sand in setting bed. 3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density. B. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated. C. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). D. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1 -1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. E. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. G. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low - amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000 -1bf (16- to 22 -kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course_ Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. END OF SECTION 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02780-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02832 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: I . Single -depth segmental gravity retaining walls without soil reinforcement. 2. Segmental retaining walls with soil reinforcement. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation for segmental retaining walls_ 2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for retaining wall footings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of segmental retaining wall and other manufactured products specified. B. Samples for selection of segmental units samples in small -scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed segmenta; unit required. C. Preconstntction Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D_ Research /Evaluation Reports: Evidence of system's compliance with building code in effect for Project from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed segmental retaining walls similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in construction with a record of successfiil in- service performance. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work, as documented according to ASTM E 548_ PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Amastone distributed by GeoWestern, Inc._ 2. Allan Block Corp. 3. Anchor Wall Systems, Inc. 4_ ICD Corp. S. Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, Inc. 6. Rockwood Retaining Wall Systems. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832-1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 RETAINING WALL UNITS A. Concrete Units: High- strength, regular- weight concrete units, designed for use in segmental retaining walls, complying with ASTM C 90, except with net -area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) for average of 3 units and 2500 psi (172 MPa) for individual unit, maximum water absorption of 8 percent, and variation in height limited to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). I. Provide units with tugs, projections, or holes and pins that locate successive courses in relation to the course below and maintain that alignment as backfilI is placed, and that interlock with units above and below. B. Colors: Provide units that result in colors of exposed wall surfaces complying with the following requirements: I. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors for materials and products of type indicated. C. Shapes: Basic shapes and dimensions are optional. Provide units with exposed face as follows, of any basic shape and dimensions that will produce retaining walls of the dimensions and profiles indicated without interfering with other elements of the Work. I . Exposed Face: Flat face with rough -split texture. 2. Batter: Provide units that offset from the course below to provide at least I/2 -inch per foot (1:24) batter. D. Special Units: Provide comer units, end units, cap units, and other special shapes as necessary to produce retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide indicated textures on exposed surfaces. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Pins: Product supplied by retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers. B. Cap Adhesive: Product supplied or recommended by retaining wall unit manufacturer for adhering cap units to units below. C. Base: Gravel or crushed stone complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No_ 57. E. Drainage Fill: Washed gravel or washed crushed stone complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No_ 57. F. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven pervious geotextile manufactured from polyester, nylon, or polypropylene fibers, as follows: . Apparent Opening Size: No. 100 (0.15 mm) per ASTM D 4751. 2. Permeability: 150 gpm/sq. ft. (100 L/s x sq. m) per ASTM D 4491. 3. Grab Strength: 100 Ibf (445 N) per ASTM D 4632. G_ Soil Reinforcement: A woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as soil reinforcement, made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides, and with the following properties: I. Tensile Strength: 4800 Ibf /ft. (70 kN /m) per ASTM D 4595. 2. Elongation: 20 percent per ASTM D 4595. 3. Apparent Opening Size: No_ 50 (0.3 mm) per ASTM D 4751. SEGMF,NTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832-2 1 t t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4. Tearing Strength: 300 Ibf (1.3 kN) per ASTM D 4533. 5. Ultraviolet Stability: 80 percent per ASTM D 4355. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive segmental retaining walls and conditions under which walls will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of retaining walls. I . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION A. General: Place units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Lay units in running bond, overlapping half units of course below. I . Form corners and ends by using special units. B. Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698. I. Place and compact in 2 layers, with soil reinforcement placed between layers. C. Leveling Course: Place unreinforced, lean concrete over base course to thickness indicated; compact and screed to a smooth, level surface. D. First Course: Place first course of retaining wall units on leveling base /course for full length of wall. Place units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level. I . Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane. 2. Place and compact fill, either drainage fill or soil fill as indicated, to top of first course_ Place fill on both sides of wall at same time without disturbing alignment of units. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. E. Subsequent Courses: Sweep excess fill from tops of course below. Place units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below. 1. For units with lugs designed to tit into holes in units of adjacent course, lay units so lugs are accurately aligned with holes and bedding surfaces are firmly seated on beds of units below. 2. For units with lips at front of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm contact with lips of units below. 3. For units with pins, carefitlly align holes in units above with holes below and insert pins according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Place and compact fill as each course is laid. Place fills on both sides of wall at same time, where both sides are indicated to be filled. 5. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. F. Cap Units: Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive according to manufacturers written instructions. r SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado i 3.3 FILL PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 2 Section "Earthwork" and retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions. B. Place, spread, and compact fill in uniform lifts for full width and length of embankment as wall is laid. Begin at back of wall and place and spread fill toward embankment. I _ Use only hand - operated compaction equipment within 36 inches (900 mm) of wall. 2. Compact drainage fill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698. C. Place filter fabric against back of wall and place a layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep behind the filter fabric to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade_ Place another layer of filter fabric between drainage fill and soil fill. 1. Wrap drainage pipe with filter fabric and place in drainage fill as indicated, sloped 1/4 inch per t foot (1:50) to drain. 3.4 2. Place impervious fill over top edge of drainage fill layer. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: For bed -joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or 1 inch in 40 feet (24 mm in 12 m) or more. B. Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of face of wall, do not vary from indicated slope by more than 114 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m). C. Variation in Plan Position: For ends and faces of walls in relation to property lines, buildings, and other objects, do not vary from plan dimensions by more than l inch (25 mm) or from depicted plan relationship (scaled dimensions) by more than 3 inches (75 nun). D. Variation in Linear Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or I inch in 40 feet (24 mm in 12 m) or more from a straight line. ' END OF SECTION 02832 F� L._J t SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 -4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02900 — LANDSCAPING PART1- GENERAL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -lime supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. I . Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. LANDSCAPING 02900-1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS M A. Drawings and general provisions Af the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide trees, plants and non -plant materials, labor and equipment required to complete installation of planting as indicated on the drawings and specified. Provide planting complete, as shown and specified on the drawings. 1. Balled and burlapped or spade dug trees 2. Contanerized shrubs, perennials, and groundcover 3. Planting soils. 4. Mulches (cobble and wood chip mulches) 5. Sodding 6. Landscape edging 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit item in this Article to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Section. B. Delivery tickets for all bulk materials with Owner's Represetnative's approval or acknowledgement that materials were received in satisfactory condition. C. Certification of grass sed vendor for each grass -seed mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species, variety, percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging D. Samples of the following: I . I cubic foot of mulch for each type required for Project, in labeled plastic bags, boxes, or buckets. 2. Edging materials and accessories 3. All items requested by Contractor for Substitution or as an Approval Equal. E. Written warranty stating all items included in the warranty, conditions of the warranty, and beginning and s ending of warranty period. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -lime supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. I . Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. LANDSCAPING 02900-1 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil- testing laboratory. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, and all applicable state and local rules and regulations. D. Inspection: Landscape Architect may inspect plants either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and quality. I . The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject at any time or place prior to final acceptance all plant materials which, in the Landscape Architect's opinion fail, to meet specifications, Inspection of materials is primarily for quality, size, and variety, but other requirements are not waived even though visual inspection results in approval. Rejected material shall be removed from the site within 24 hours. 2. The Contractor shall schedule inspection of the plants, at either the supplier or on site, to be completed in one visit. Any further incpsection required due to plants being unavailable or rejected as not meeting specifications shall be charged to the Contractor at the current hourly rate for Landscape Architect's personnel performing the inspection. E. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. F_ Pre - installation Conference: Contractor shall attend a landscape re- installation conference at locations specified by Owner's Representative. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver bare -root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare -root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems froth sun scald, drying, wind bum, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball D. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod Producers Associations's (ASPA) "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/Installing:. Protect sod from drying and breaking. E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.6 WARRANTY A_ Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. LANDSCAPING 02900-2 1 1 Ll L t t fl 1 t 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of (1) year after date of Final Acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects, resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty perios, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. I PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in PIant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well- shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. a. Trees b. Shrubs C. Ground Covers and Perennials d. Sodded Areas e. Seeded Areas I PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in PIant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well- shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. I LANDSCAPING 02900-3 t B. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. C_ Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades confirming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Provide specimen grade trees. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect with a proportionate increase in size of roots and balls. D. Perennials: Provide healthy, disease -free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well- established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery, E. All plants shall be the species designated on the Drawings. No substitutions will be accepted without the prior written approval of the Landscape Archtitect. 2.2 TREES A. Shade Trees: Single stem trees Nvith straight trunk, well balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI 7_60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height. 2. Branching Height: 1/2 of tree height. B. Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species type, and with relationship to caliper, height, and branching recommendations by ANSI Z60.1, and stem form as ' designated on drawings. I LANDSCAPING 02900-3 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Evergreen Trees: Specimen quality, well balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required conforming to ANSI Z60.1. D. Provide balled and burlapped trees. E. Container -grown trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped trees subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock. All deciduous trees of one species used in formal rows or groupings shall exhibit cultural uniformity i.e. matched in height crown width and shape, height to first branch, and trunk taper. For this reason it is desired that these trees produced by a single grower. SHRUBS 2.3 A. Form and Size I. Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required and measured according to ANSI Z60.1, for type, shape and height of shrub. Root development shall be sufficient to hold the soil in the shape of the container when removed but without visible circling roots. 1 Normal- quality, well balanced, broadleaf evergreens of type height, spread, and shape required conforming to ANSI Z60. 1. B. Provide container grown or balled and burlapped as indicated on plans. 2.4 GROUND COVERS AND PERENNIALS A_ Provide ground covers and plants established and well rooted in removable container or integral peat pots and with not less than the minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size indicated. 2.5 SOD A. Certified turf grass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine -cut thickness, size, strength moisture content, and mowed height, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide visible sod of uniform density, color, and texture of the following turf grass species, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. I. Sod shall be Colorado grown, bluegrass /fescue blend, a mixture of 3 improved bluegrass varieties, complying with applicable State and Federal codes. B. Sod which has dried out, or with soil that breaks, tears, or crumbles away will not be accepted. Sod shall be kept moist, protected from the sun, heat or wind and after delivery. Prior to cutting, the sod shall be evenly mown for a blade length of at least I - inch but not more than 2- inches. 2.6 TOP SOIL A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials ham-ifid to plant growth. LANDSCAPING 02900-4 1 t 1 n LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.7 SOIL AMENDMENTS /PLANT MIX A. Litre: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No.8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No_ 60 sieve. 1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone. B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. C. Aspen Rich Compost as supplied by Southwest Soils, 970 - 323 -6300. D. A I Organics Premium 3; as supplied by A 1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 303 - 454 -3492 2.8 FERTILIZER A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. B. Slow - Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisitng of 50 percent water - insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition or equal organic based: C. Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight in shrub and flower beds. D. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight in turf grass areas. 2.9 MULCHES A. Compost Mulch: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through I -inch (25 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 3 decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. B. Materials: Place weed barrier fabric is required under the bark and cobble mulch. I. Type -1: Basic Shredded Bark Mulch as supplied by Southwest Soils, 970 - 323 -6300 to installed to tree, shrub and plant beds; or an approved equal. 2. Type -2: Garden Prep as supplied by Garden Wise, 1 -800- 332 -1245 to be installed in groundcover and perennial beds; or an approved equal. 3. Type -3 Cobble Driplines: %" Local River Rock as supplied by Pioneer Sand Company, Golden, Co.,303 -279 -4748; or an approved equal. C. Installation: Place mulch in all plant saucers 3" deep. Place mulch uniformly in all planting beds at 3" deep. Clean up area of work after installing mulch. 2.10 WEED- CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz. /sq. yd. (101g /sq. m) minimum. ' B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle- punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz. /sq. yd. (162 g /sq. m). LANDSCAPING 02900-5 ( LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.11 LANDSCAPE EDGING A. Materials: Place edging material bordering planting beds as shown on drawings. Edging shall be tacked in place with I foot edging straps at each 10' section and once in the middle. Distance between straps shall not exceed 5'. 1. Type: Bend -a -Board 6" edging as supplied by Jensen Sales, 303 -791 -4250; or an approved equal. B. Installation: Trench along the border of planting beds 6" deep and place edging. The top of the edging shall be l " above grade so as to retain mulch and provide edge for grass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Tillable Soil: Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches prior to placing top soil and soil amendments. Remove stones larger than I inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Positive Surface Drainage: Finish and fine grade the project area to establish an even and well matched gradient over the entire surface. Provide postitive surface drainage, with no depressions, settling, or irregularites in the finished grade. C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture_ Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree r angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare -root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of tine root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil if approved by Landscape Architect. 3.3 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60. I . I B. Remove stein girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent , finish grades. LANDSCAPING 02900-6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Balled and Potted or Container - Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 4. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one -half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 6. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Bare -Root Stock: Set and support bare -root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grade_ 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. 3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one -half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil- testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil - covered roots about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil_ E_ When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. 3.5 GROUND COVER, PERENNIAL AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill- C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. I LANDSCAPING t C 02900-7 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed- control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulsh against trunks and stems. I . Thickness: 2- inches deep in ground cover and perennial bed areas. 2. Thickness: 3- inches deep in shrub and bed areas. C. Mulch tree rings in turf out to dripline with 3 -inch depth specified organic mulch. 33 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Maintain trees, shrubs, groundcovers and perennials unitl until final acceptance by Owner. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. F. Maintain turf grass immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established and until final acceptance by Owner. 3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landcape work as directed. END OF SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING 02900-8 1 t 1 1 1 1� 11 1 J LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections: I . Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on- grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with, fly ash. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A_ Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix_ Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. I . Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site_ C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: I. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form- release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4_ Fiber reinforcement. 5. Admixtures. 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. S. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. CASTAN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Epoxy joint filler. 12. Joint- filler strips. 13. Repair materials. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -I or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code- - Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM - FACING MATERIALS A_ Smooth - Formed Finished Concrete: Form- facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS I, and as follows: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a. Medium - density overlay, Class I, or better, mill- release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough - Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), unless otherwise indicated.. E. Form- Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. I. Formulate form - release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form- facing materials. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide the following: a. US SPEC Ezkote, or US SPEC Slickote, or US SPEC Safekote; US MIX Products Co. 303- 778 -7227 (Or Approved Similar) F. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass- fiber- reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. I. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than I inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface_ STEEL REINFORCEMENT 2.2 A. Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Bars: [ASTM A 615/A 615M, ::r:!d0 60 (Grade 4211)] [ASTM A 706 /A 706M], deformed bars, [ASTM A 775/A 775M] [or] [ASTM A 934/A 934M], epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each i 2- ;:.:, bar length. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D_ Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber- reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: I. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class l plastic - protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to { length with ends square and free of burrs. *_ 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type If. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. B. Normal - Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as Follows: I. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. C. Lightweight Aggregate: per ASTM C330, '/4" nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containine calcium chloride. B. Air- Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High- Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water - Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. j F. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 FILL MATERIALS A_ Fine- Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75 -mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15 -mm) sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. ' B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder. Waterborne, monomolecular film Forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. (305 g /sq. m) dry- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - 0330o a LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable_ E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy - Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: I . Type 11, non -load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2_ Types I and 11, non -load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement - based, polymer- modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. I. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 1 Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. B. Repair Topping: Traffic- bearing, cement - based, polymer- modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 114 inch (6 mm). I. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2, Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: I . Proportion normal- weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Proportion light- weight concrete mixes as indicated on structural drawings. D. Proportion normal- weight concrete mixes as indicated on structural drawings. E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: I. Fly Ash: 15 percent. G. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: as indicated H. Air Content: Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as indicated. L Do not air entrain concrete to trowel - finished interior floor slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. J. Limit water - soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. K. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix for exterior concrete flatworkat manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb /cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m). L. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. I . Use water - reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2. Use corrosion - inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1 l l6, and furnish batch ticket information. I. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. CASTAN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: I. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). D_ Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to I vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. I . Do not use nest- stained steel form - facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible_ Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. Fl. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, linkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. I i I I I I K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form- release agent, according to m anti fac turer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. . Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A_ General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form- removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. 28 -day design compressive strength. 2. At least 70 percent of 28 -day design compressive strength. 3. Determine compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory- cured test specimens according to ACl 301. 4. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal'of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form- facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form- release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Fine - Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine- graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). B. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 ntnt). I . Place and compact a 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) thick layer of fine- graded granular material over granular fill. STEEL REINFORCEMENT 3.5 A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or Feld -weld reinforcement according to AWS Dl_4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 V 1 t a LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one and one hole mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire_ 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway- section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for grade beams in the middle third of spans. 4_ Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.. 5. Use epoxy - bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces_ C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Fomm weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: After removing formwork, install joint - filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 2. Install joint - filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 1 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. Do not drop concrete in forms from a height exceeding 60 inches. I . Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer_ Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. I. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures_ When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot - Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot - weather conditions exist: I. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at lime of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option_ 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water- soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 n I 1 L_.1 I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES u Rough - Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. For concrete surfaces below ground. B. Smooth - Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth - formed finish. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces_ Do not wet concrete surfaces. B_ Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Typical for all interior slabs. I. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid - applied or sheet waterproofing, built -up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10 -foot- (3.05 -m -) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) Typical interior floors except gymnasium b. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in Gymnasium C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. t. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber - bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. D. Trowel and fine broom finish: for locations where the or carpet is to be installed (refer to Room Finish Schedule). CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B_ Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel - troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 1. Provide 6" thick housekeeping pads with welded wire mesh reinforcement at mechanical equipment. Coordinate sizes and locations with mechanical design. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot - weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h (I kg /sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces_ If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturers written instnictions. I. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, faitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 1 t t 0 L� 'J 1 Ll 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B_ Sealing Coat. Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one - half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2 -mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than I inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. t I . Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 114 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturers written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes I inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. F. 3.14 Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m),' but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive- strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal- weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5_ Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample_ 6. Compressive - Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test nvo laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days, one at 28 days, and one specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.. a. A compressive - strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive - strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 u u n LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -and 28 -day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03300 ' CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15 I I SECTION 03410 - PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division t Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast structural concrete. 2. Precast structural concrete with commercial architectural finish. B. Related Sections: I . Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete topping and placing connection anchors in concrete. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for inserts or anchorages required for precast concrete slab connections. 3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for furnishing and installing connections attached to structural -steel framing_ 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes. 5. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing receivers and reglets. 6. Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for joint - fuller materials for fire - resistance -rated construction. 7. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elaslomeric joint sealants and sealant backings. 13 DEFINITION A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved precast structural concrete color, finish, and texture, preapproved by Architect. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design precast stnuctural concrete, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Precast stntctural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. C. Structural Performance: Provide precast structural concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and tinder conditions indicated on structural drawings. 1. Design precast structural concrete framing system and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live -load I PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410- 1 h n. C 1❑ For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast structural concrete units with architectural finish, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 ntnt). a. Where other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete. PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE UON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary building structure, and other building movements. Maintain precast structural concrete deflections within limits of ACI 318 (ACI 318M). Thermal Movements: Allow for in -plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of minus 30 to plus 110 deg F. Fire - Resistance Rating: Select material and minimum thicknesses to provide indicated fire rating. Vehicular Impact Loads: Design spandrel beams acting as vehicular barriers for passenger cars to resist a single 6000 -lbf (26.7 -kN) service load and 10,000 -lbf (44.5 -kN) ultimate load applied horizontally in any direction to the spandrel beam, with anchorages or attachments capable of transferring this load to the structure. Design spandrel beams assuming the load to act at a height of 18 inches (460 mm) above the floor or ramp surface on an area not to exceed I sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m). dITTALS ict Data: For each type of product indicated. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water- absorption tests. Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units. . Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. 2. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 3. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Detail loose and cast -in hardware, lifting and erection inserts, connections, and joints. 5. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction. 6. Include and locate openings larger than by 10 inches (250 nun). 7. Indicate location of each precast structural concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel. 8. Indicate relationship of precast structural concrete units to adjacent materials. 9. Indicate locations and details of brick units, including comer units and special shapes, and joint treatment. 10_ Indicate estimated camber for precast floor slabs with concrete toppings. It. Indicate shim sizes and grouting sequence. 12. Design Modifications: if design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept. Samples: 03410-2 e e t s I I I I 11 - I I 1 1 1.6 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Samples for each thin- or half -brick unit required, showing full range of color and texture expected. Include Samples showing color and texture of joint treatment. a. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing manufacturer's full range of colors. b. Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment. E. Delegated- Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency. G. Welding certificates. H. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons. 3. Admixtures. 4. Bearing pads. 5_ Structural -steel shapes and hollow structural sections. I. Material Test Reports: For aggregates. J. Source quality- control reports. K. Field quality- control reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural concrete units indicated. D. Quality - Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: I . AWS D 1.I /D.1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D 1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." F. Fire- Resistance Calculations- Where indicated, provide precast stnuctural concrete units whose fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or has been calculated PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado according to PC] MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Mockups: After sample panel approval but before production of precast structural concrete units with architectural finish, construct fill -sized mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup as indicated on Drawings including sealants and precast structural concrete units with an architectural finish complete with anchors, connections, flashings, and joint fillers. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.7 A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock- absorbing material in same position as during storage. B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. 1. Store units with dunnage across full width of each bearing point unless otherwise indicated. 2. Place adequate dunnage of even thickness between each unit. 3. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected. C. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage. D. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, [or installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MOLD MATERIALS A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non - absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes. Mold- Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid- release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete. PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-4 u Li LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184 /A 184M, fabricated from deformed bars, assembled with clips. D. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. E. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116- 2.3 PRESTRESSING TENDONS A. Pretensioning Strand: Per structural drawings and manufacturer requirements_ B. Unbonded Post - Tensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7 -wire, low- relaxation strand. I . Coat unbonded post- tensioning strand with post- tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.6 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.6. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies. C. Post - Tensioning Bars: ASTM A 722, uncoated high - strength steel bar. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type 111, gray, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: I. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast - Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal- Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. 1. Face - Mixture- Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample. 2. Face- Mixture -Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate unless otherwise approved by Architect. PLANT- PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral -oxide pigments or colored water - reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading. E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCl MNL 116. F. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. I . Water- Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2- Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D- 4. Water- Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 5. High- Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High- Range, Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M. H. Corrosion- Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 2.5 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Carbon - Steel -l- leaded Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS DI.I /DI.IM, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 1 16. C. Carbon -Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M. D. Malleable -Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M_ E. Carbon -Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60 -30 (Grade 415 -205). F. High - Strength, Low -Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M. G. Carbon -Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. H. Wrought Carbon -Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450). 1. Deformed -Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M. J. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon - steel, hex -head bolts and studs; carbon -steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844, K. High - Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon -steel washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M). PLANT- PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-6 i H C C ' LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) bolts. L. Zinc - Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. ' I . For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent. ' 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc- dust - content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD- P- 21035B or SSPC -Paint 20. M. Shop- Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized -steel items, except those surfaces to be ' embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC -SP 3, and shop apply lead- and chromate -free, rust- inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 according to SSPC -PA 1. ' N. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. O. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required to install precast structural concrete units. 2.6 BEARING PADS A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application: 1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412. 2. Random- Oriented, Fiber - Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. 70 to 90 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test I specimen for every 200 pads used in Project. 3. Cotton -Duck- Fabric - Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cotton -duck ' fabric bonded to an elastomer; 80 to 100 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's " AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Specifications," Division 11, Section 18.10.2; or with MIL- C -882E. 4_ Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass -fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless- or mild -steel plate, of type required for in- service stress. 5. High- Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip. ' 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand - Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ' ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of I part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. ' B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage - compensating agents, plasticizing and water - reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30- minute working time. ' C. Epoxy -Resin Grout: Two - component, mineral- tilled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881 M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements- PLANT-PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-7 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast - furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water- soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218 /C 1218M. D. Normal- Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixture as directed by Structural Engineer of record by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211. 1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties: L Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 2. Maximum Water- Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 116. F. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide lightweight concrete with the following properties: Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb /cu. ft. (1842 kg /cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb /cu. ft. (48 kg /cu. m), according to ASTM C 567. G. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116. H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.9 MOLD FABRICATION A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete - placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent_ Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with form - release agent. B. Maintain molds to provide completed precast structural concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified. PLANT- PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-8 t 7 H r, t 0 I I LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. Edge and Comer Treatment: Uniformly radiused. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Cast -in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. Weld- headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast -in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings. D_ Cast -in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension_ Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval. E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. I _ Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy- coated reinforcement exceeds limits specified, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete - placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. 3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4 -inch (19 -nun) minimum coverage. Increase cover requirements according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. 4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. f. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. G- Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post - tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116- PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-9 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Delay detensioning or post- tensioning of precast, prestressed structural concrete units until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete. 2. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading_ 3. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses. 4. Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc -rich, or epoxy paint to avoid corrosion and possible rust spots. 5. Protect strand ends and anchorages with a minimum of 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) thick, nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout mortar and sack rub surface. Coat or spray the inside surfaces of pocket with bonding agent before installing grout. H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. I. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of I inch (25 mm) or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified. J. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face - mixture concrete. K. Thotoughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built -in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116. Place self - consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR -6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self- Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." L. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold- weather concrete placement_ M. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot - weather concrete placement. N. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. O. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low- pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product_ Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCi MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval- 2.11 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and comers precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product distension tolerances- PLANT-PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410- 10 n t t 1 1 Ll 2.12 COMMERCIAL FINISHES LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Unexposed areas to be Commercial Grade: Remove fins and large protrusions and fill large holes. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces must have true, well - defined surfaces. Air holes, water marks, and color variations are permitted. Limit form joint offsets to 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Exposed areas to be Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter with sand- cement paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in. (1300 sq. mm). Grind smooth form offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repair surface blemishes due to holes or dents in molds. Discoloration at form joints is permitted. C. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or defects are not permitted. D. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) to precast concrete units that will receive concrete topping after installation. 1 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate precast structural concrete fabricator's quality- control and testing methods. 1. Allow testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with testing agency and provide samples of materials ' and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation. B. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MN 116 requirements_ I. Test and inspect self - consolidating concrete according to PC] TR -6. C. Strength of precast structural concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength. D. If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply with ' ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, employ a qualified testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M. 1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect. 2. Cores will be tested in an air -dry condition or, if units will be wet under service conditions, test cores after immersion in water in a wet condition. 3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28 -day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28 -day design compressive strength. 4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the following: a. Project identification name and number. b. Date when tests were performed. C. Name of precast concrete fabricator. d. Name of concrete testing agency. ' PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410- 11 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks, corrected for length- diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed. E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast structural concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with same precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces. F. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting, cast -in- place, building structural framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or until supporting steel or other structure is complete. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast structural concrete units to supporting members and back-tip materials. B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection. I . Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast structural concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating. 2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout full voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed. 4. For hollow -core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs. C. Connect precast stnuct►ral concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as othenvisc indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing. D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of the Architect. t d t t t PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410- 12 1 1 1 1 L _, LtOrt SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder - actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units. F. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/DI.IM and AWS DIA for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Protect precast structural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required_ 2. Clean weld - affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a minimum 4.0 -mil- (0.1 -mm -) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780. 3_ Clean weld- affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and reprime damaged painted surfaces. 4. Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds. G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench_ Fl. Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. I . Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. 2. Fill joints completely without seepage to other surfaces. 3. Trowel top of grout joints on roofs smooth and uniform_ Finish transitions between different surface levels not steeper than 1 to 12. 4. Place grout end cap or dam in voids at ends of hollow -core slabs. 5. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. 6. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135. B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspcctions: Erection of precast stnuctural concrete members. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High- strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections. I PLANT - PRECAST TR T RAL CONCRETE S UC U CONC E E 03410- 13 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado ' D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with ' specified requirements. F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of ' replaced or additional work with specified requirements. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. ' 3.5 REPAIRS A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect. ` 1. Repairs may be pernitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and appearance of units has not been impaired. ' B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, ' when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m). C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. D_ Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime- painted components with same type of shop primer. ' E_ Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect. 3.6 CLEANING ' A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to ' remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. I. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials_ END OF SECTION 03410 ' PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410- 14 ' i u r s LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 03542 — CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cement - based, polymer - modified, self - leveling underlayment for interior finish flooring repair and patching. Contractor to ensure that patch compounds will bond with existing underlayment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of cement -based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed cement -based underlayment applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate cement -based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections. 1. Before installing surface sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer, if any, verify compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives. CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542-1 I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the ' Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Self - Leveling Underlayment; W. R. Bonsai Company. 2. 300 Premium Underlayment; Burke Group, LLC (The). 3. LeveLayer 1; Dayton Superior Corp. 4. Firm -Fill® 2010, Hacker Industries, Inc. 5. Thoro Underlayment, Self - Leveling; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. 6. Levelex Underlayment; L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 7. Ultra/Plan MB; Mapei Corporation. 8. Gyp -Crete 2000; Maxxon Corp. 2.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS A. Underlayment: Cement - based, polymer- modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 118 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. I . Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. 3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient- emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated_ B. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm), or coarse sand as recommended by ' underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg Q. D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only after unsatisfactory I conditions have been corrected. 1 CEMENT -RASED UNDERLAYMENT 1 03542-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A_ General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral -pH substrate for underlayment application. I. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates. Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form - release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply corrosion- resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment -to- substrate and intercoat adhesion. 2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturers recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. I . Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Slump Test: If slump testing is recommended in writing by manufacturer, test underlayment for slump as it is placed for compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations. CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Field Samples: Take at least three molded -cube samples from each underlayment batch. Test samples according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M for compliance with compressive- strength requirements. When requested, provide test results to Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period END OF SECTION 03542 CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAVMENT 03542 -4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Stone trim units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. S. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. I . Refer to Drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. C. Samples for selection of the following: 1. Colored - masonry mortar samples showing the fill range of colors available. 2. Weep holes /vents in color to match mortar color. D. Samples for verification of the following: I. Full -size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: I . Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 1 Masonry units. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -1 11 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the f following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction with specified requirements: 1. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, test masonry prisms per ASTM E 447, Method B. 2. Test mortar properties per test methods of ASTM C 270. 3. Test groat compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Single- Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. ' I . Locate mockups on site in the locations as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. a. Include window complying with requirements of Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows." b. Seal perimeter of window complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and limes when mockups will be constructed. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather - resistant membrane. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b_ Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract , Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. I. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -2 L LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. I . Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: I. Cold- Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C) Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. C. 25 to 20 deg F (4 to -7 deg C): Fleat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg Q. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction. d. 20 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C). Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosures. 2. Cold- Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a_ 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C)- Cover masonry with a weather- resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction. b. 25 to 20 deg F (4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours aller construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks I when wind velocity exceeds 15 nui./h (25 km/h). C_ 20 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. E. Hot - Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Concrete Masonry Units: a. Best Block /Keystone. b. Clalite.Inc. C. Robinson Block Co. 2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. I. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside corners. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight or Normal weight. 3. Provide Type 1, moisture- controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048104 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3 -5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm) nominal: 5 -5/8 inch (143 mm) actual. C. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7 -5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inch (250 mm) nominal: 9 -5/8 inch (244 mm) actual. e. 12 inch (300 mm) nominal: 11 -5/8 inch (295 mm) actual. f. 16 inch (400 mm) nominal: 15 -5/8 inch (397 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: As selected by Architect or indicated on Drawings. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. 1. For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement -lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black. D_ Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404, F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M). 2. Grade 60 (Grade 400). B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 zinc coating. C. Welded -Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon -steel wire, coating class as follows: 2. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class I, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for exterior walls. 3. ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for both interior and exterior walls. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: . Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). 2.07 A. B. C. D. E. F. 2.08 A TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. Wire: As follows_ I . Galvanized Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. 2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). Steel Sheet: As follows: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 60 (ASTM A 526M, Z 180) (commercial quality), steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication, for sheet -metal ties and anchors in interior walls and in exterior walls when completely embedded in mortar. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: For steel sheet hot -dip galvanized by continuous process prior to Fabrication: 1. 0.0785 inch (2.0 mm). Galvanized Heavy- Thickness Steel Sheet: ASTM A 635 (ASTM A 635M) (commercial quality) liot- rolled, carbon -steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 or B -3, as applicable, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch (4.6 mm) and greater. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B -1, B -2, or B -3, as applicable to size and form indicated. ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME General: Provide 2 -piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. I. For anchorage to concrete, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular - shaped wire tie section sized to extend within f inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 min). 2. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1 /4 -inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular - shaped wire tie section sized to extend within I inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -6 t I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado a_ Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2.09 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY - VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide 2 -piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics: I . Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100 -lbf (445 -N) load in either tension or compression without deforming over, or developing play in excess of, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). B. Screw- Attached, Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: I. W ire Tie Shape: Triangular or rectangular. 2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into masonry wythe of veneer face. 3. Anchor Section: Rib - stiffened, sheet -metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) thick by 2 -3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; fabricated into tee shape with 2 projecting tabs, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide by I inch (25 mm) long; with slotted holes for connection of vertical legs of triangular or rectangular wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. C. Stainless -Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon -steel drill point and 300 Series stainless -steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer; No. 10 (4.8 -mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex mats and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet -Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below: t 1. Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate through -wall metal flashing embedded in masonry as follows: a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3 -inch (75 -nmm) intervals along length of flashing to provide a 3 -way integral mortar bond and weep -hole drainage. 3. Fabricate metal expansion joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape indicated. 4. Application: Use where flashing is fully or partly concealed in masonry wall. B_ Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound, 26 mils (0.7 mm) thick, bonded completely I UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -7 r 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado and integrally to a high - density, cross - laminated polyethylene film, 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, to produce an overall thickness of 30 mils (0.8 mm). I. Primer: Flashing manufacturer's standard product or product recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to masonry and concrete. 2. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: a. Perm -A- Barrier Wall Flashing; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. b. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: t . Neoprene or urethane. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. I . Styrene- Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA -805_ C. Bond - Breaker Strips: Asphalt - saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep Holes: Provide (lie following: I. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1 -1/2 by 3 -1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm). ' D. Cavity Drainage Material: 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) thick, reticulated, nonabsorbent mesh, made from polyethylene strands and shaped to maintain drainage at weep holes without being clogged by mortar droppings. 2.12 WALL VENTS A. Galvanized Steel Wall Vents: Galvanized steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized louvers and frames not less than 0.125 inch thick and assembled by welding, incorporating weep holes. 2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS , A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2 -cup (0.14 -L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2 -cup (0.14 -L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in I gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard - strength, general - purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar /grout stains, efflorescence, and other new constriction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. I . For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. ' 2. For dark - colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface - acting acids and special inhibitors. r UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810 -8 6 I e ' LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air - entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water - repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: I . Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 4. For exterior, above - grade, load - bearing and nonload- bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load- bearing walls; for interior nonload- bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. D. Self- Consolidating Grout for Unit Masonry I. Proportioned in accordance with ASTM 0476 Table I for coarse grout and conforming to requirements of ACI 301, ready mixed concrete. 2. Provide self - consolidating grout with slump flow of 22" minimum to 30" maximum. 3. Minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 2000 psi is required, using ASTM C1019 Standard Sampling Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 4. Extra Water: Grout shall be delivered to the jobsite within batch tolerances as prescribed according to ASTM C -94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. Should additional water or admixture be required at the jobsite to achieve the required minimum slump flow, it shall be added only at the direction of an authorized ready -mixed concrete supplier representative and shall be noted as such on the delivery ticket. Slump Flow shall be retested and documented after water or admixture is added PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810 -9 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Examine rough -in and built -in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single -wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as ' required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use fiill -size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water - cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform r blend of colors and textures. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES I A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external comers, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 in) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 nt), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 in), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plats and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Variation in Cross - Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 nnn). E. Variation in Mortar -Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed -joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed - joint thickness from bed -joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from head -joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head joint thickness from adjacent head -joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar - joint thickness indicated by more than minus 114 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm)_ 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS I UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -10 1 A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: I. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in ail courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out fiill mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) joints. I UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -11 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than- half -size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. I. As indicated on Drawings. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. ' E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 -unit length for one -half running bond or 1/3 -unit length for one -third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. I. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. H. Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core_ I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. J. Build nonload- bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure ' above and as follows: . Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: I. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in ail courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out fiill mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) joints. I UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -11 t t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct - applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.06 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. I_ Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. B. Tie exterior wythe to back -up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses. C. Tie exterior wythe to back -up with continuous horizontal -joint reinforcing. ' 3.07 HORIZONTAL -JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal -joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint I block course above and below wall openings and , extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening. 4. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.08 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: I. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c_ horizontally. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to metal studs with masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -12 i t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with 2 metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Fasten anchors through sheathing to metal studs with metal fasteners of type indicated. 3. Insert anchor section in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 4. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 -inch (50 -mm) air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 5. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm). 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build -in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement_ B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond - breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control -joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints_ Install bond - breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove when unit masonry is complete. C. Build -in horizontal pressure - relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Locate horizontal pressure - relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to stnicture behind masonry veneer. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. I . Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU. 2. Provide prefabricated or built -in -place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and fulled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built -in -place lintels until cured. 3. Provide either of above at Contractors option or provide precast or formed -in -place concrete lintels complying with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. I UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -13 1 LION SQUARE L ODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 4G, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS I: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other .,��.,.,ctions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. At masonry- veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up face of sheathing at least S inches (200 mm), and behind air - infiltration barrier/building paper. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 nun) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 4_ Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity. Space vents and close off cavities vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry. 3 -13 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A_ Temporary Formwork and Shores: Constrict formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during constriction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -14 ii 1 1 1 I! II C' i LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Grouting I. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 2. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. 3. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. 4. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c. 5. Place self - consolidating grout within I Y: hours after mix water has been added unless prior arrangements and mix design adjustments have been made by the ready mix concrete supplier representative. 6. Do not mechanically vibrate self - consolidating grout. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonntasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4_ Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Job -mixed detergent solution. 6. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -15 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 04860 — STONE ASSEMBLIES PART1- GENERAL Lt t SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior stone veneer. B. Design selections: I. Provide 5 Telluride Gold stone veneer or equivalent at building base, retaining wall veneers, and stone arches as shown on plans. 2. Provide stone caps at top of stone walls, stone piers, and window sills. Cap to be Buff Sandstone or equivalent. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. . For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include data on physical properties specified. B. Stone Samples for Verification: For each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required. C. Colored Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color required. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone masons and stone fitters who are skilled in installing stone veneer assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose projects have a record of successfid in- service performance. B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single manufacturer with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D_ Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of stone veneer assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by fiill thickness, including face and backup. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include through -wall flashing installed for a 24 -inch (600 -mm) length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12 -inch (300 -mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone veneer above half of flashing). SCONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado ' 2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather - resistant membrane. 3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Contractor in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Contractor in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1A PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Veneer Assemblies: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone veneer assemblies when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. ' 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold - weather construction requirements contained in ACl 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. I. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg f (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot - Weather Requirements: Comply with hot - weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6ffMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE A. Match Architect's samples for variety, color range, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. STONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-2 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Design selections: 1. Provide S' Telluride Gold or equivalent at building base, retaining wall veneers, and stone arches as shown on plans. 2. Provide stone caps at top of stone walls, stone piers, and window sills. Cap to be Buff Sandstone or equivalent. 2.3 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: I. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A 580 /A 580M, Type 316. 2. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Formed Isom W 1.7 or 0.148 -inch- (3.8 -mm -) diameter, stainless -steel wire. C_ Adjustable, Screw - Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: S'T'ONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-3 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or IL Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low - Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114- I B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207_ D. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. C 144 follows: E. Aggregate: ASTM and as I . For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve. 2. Colored Aggregates: Natural- colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural or synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortars. G. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part of or all gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex- additive manufacturer for use with job -mixed portland cement mortar and not containing a retarder. I . Latex Additive: Styrene - butadiene ribber or acrylic resin. H. Water: Potable. 2.3 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: I. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A 580 /A 580M, Type 316. 2. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Formed Isom W 1.7 or 0.148 -inch- (3.8 -mm -) diameter, stainless -steel wire. C_ Adjustable, Screw - Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: S'T'ONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-3 LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following): a. Dur -O -WaI, a Dayton Superior Company b. Heckmann Building Products Inc. C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire -Bond. 2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100 -lbf (445 -N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib - stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 5 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. 4. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097 -inch- (2.5 -mm -) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 5. Wire Ties: Triangular -, rectangular -, or T- shaped wire ties fabricated from 025 -inch- (6.4 -mm -) diameter, hot -dip galvanized -steel wire. D. Stainless -Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon -steel drill point and 300 Series stainless -steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-min diameter) by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dur -O -WaI, a Dayton Superior Company; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. b_ ITW Buildex; Scots Long Life Teks. 2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS "Sheet A. Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section Metal Flashing and Trim." 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES ' A. Compressible Filler Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A t ; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC_ B. Weep Holes: I. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1 -1/2 inches (10 by 38 mm) by thickness of stone veneer assembly. 2. Plastic Weep Hole /Vent: One- piece, flexible extnrsion made from UV- resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8 inch (3 mm) from exterior face of stone veneer, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free - draining mesh made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. SCONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2 -cup (0.14 -L) dry- measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2 -cup (0.14 -L) dry- measure laundry detergent dissolved in l gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard - strength cleaner designed for removing mortar /grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by stone producer. 2.7 STONE FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone in sizes and shapes necessary to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings. B. Cut and select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. I . Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. C. Thickness of Stone Veneer: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: I. Thickness: 3 -1/2 and 1 -1 /2 inches as indicated on the Drawings phis or minus 1/2 inch. D. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. E. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. G. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air - entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water - repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. I. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S. C. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: I part Portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. STONE ASSFMBIAES 04860-5 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather - resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. inches (300 mm), and behind weather- resistant sheathing paper. 3.2 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform field cutting trimming as is r ' necessary and stone set. mm) into masonry at each end. I . Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw -cut surfaces. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. 4_ At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to 6. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. down to fomt a drip. C. Arrange stones in three- course, random -range ashlar pattern with random course heights, random lengths obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. (interrupted coursed), and unifonn joint widths. D. Arrange dispersed for blended stones with color and size variations uniformly an evenly appearance. E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) at widest points. F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. ' I . Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." r G. Sheet metal flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. I. At stud - framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up the face of sheathing at least 12 inches (300 mm), and behind weather- resistant sheathing paper. 2. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned tip a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm), and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. "] ' 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing fiull length of angles but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. 4_ At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends. 5. At ends of head and sill flashing turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 6. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to fomt a drip. r H. Flexible flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. r STONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-6 r# f t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing ' 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 2. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 3. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. 1. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing. 1. Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated -metal veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in concrete. B. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with adjustable, screw- attached veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to framing with two screws. C. Embed veneer anchors in'mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1 -1 /2 incites (38 mm), through stone masonry and with at least 5/8 -inch (I6 -mm) cover on outside face. D. Space anchors not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (300 min) of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm). E. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors into mortar joints as stone is set. ' F. Fill space between back of stone masonry and concrete walls below grade with mortar as stone is set. G. Provide 1 -inch (25 -mm) cavity between stone masonry and backup construction unless otherwise indicated. Keep cavity free of mortar droppings and debris. I. Place mortar spots in cavity at veneer anchors to maintain spacing. 2. Slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. 3. Rake mortar for a drystack appearance_ Keep joint 3/4" from face of all adjacent stones, minimum. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: ' 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. � I STONE ASSEMBLIES 04860 - 7 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes_ 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape_ 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand - cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised 11, using job -mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's .written instructions. 7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in 1LI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." 3.5 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil - contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. END OF SECTION 04860 STONE ASSEMBLIES 04860-8 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel_ B. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional structural provisions. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural - steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip- critical high - strength bolted connections. 5. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D_ Qualification Data: For fabricator and professional engineer. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: I . Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. I STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - l u LION SQUARE L ODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Shear stud connectors. 4. Shop primers. 5. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality- control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the State of Colorado where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. Shop - Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P I or SSPC- QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1. I, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: I _ AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Stnicturai Steel Buildings." 3. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Stnuctural Sections." 4. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single -Angle Members." 5. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. I. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or nasty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures_ Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other constniction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W- Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345). B. Channels, Angles- Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 I d 'J a r � J 0 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36 /A 36M_ D. Cold- Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. I . Weight Class: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. A In C 43 E. F. BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS High- Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish. Plain. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. Unheaded Anchor Rods: Steel grade as indicated on Structural Drawings. I . Configuration: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 361A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain and hot -dip zinc coating as indicated on Stnuctural Drawings. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold - finished carbon steel. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold - finished carbon steel. 2.3 PRIMER A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. Unprimed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP I, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Primed Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." B_ Primers: I. Unprimed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 25, Type 11, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. STRUCTURALSTEEL 05120-3 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Primed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust- inhibiting primer. ' 3. Primed Exposed Metal Surfaces: Provide shop primer that complies with Division 9 Section "Painting." 2.4 GROUT A. In accordance with Division 3 Section "Grout." 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 1. Camber structural steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high - strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC -SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Do not paint surfaces to receive welded stud shear connectors. G. Steel Wall- Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall- opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wail framing_ H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base -Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ' Vail, Colorado 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS ' A. High - Strength Bolts: Shop install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. I. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings, B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 131.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, ' appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without ' exceeding tolerances of A1SC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show - through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. ' b. Grind or 611 exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 23 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop following: prime steel surfaces except the 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a ' depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high - strength boiled with slip- critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire - resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: I. Unprimed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non - Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 3_ Primed Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in fill coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. ' I. Apply Iwo coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 E. Splice members only where indicated. I STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 , LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry- bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, ' and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B_ Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, ' plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting construction until cast -in -place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. , 3.3 ERECTION Set in locations to indicated and according to AISC's "Code of ' A_ structural steel accurately and elevations Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings- - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." ' B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry- bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. ' L Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug - tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before ' packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. ' 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of' erection and mean temperature ' when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. I STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 , 1 1 FJ G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection_ LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins_ Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 1. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High- Strength Bolts: Install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS DI.I for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with A1SC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show- through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind bull welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. ' 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high- strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: 1. Bolt Testing: Test 2 percent of all high strength bolts, nuts, and washers for compliance with all provisions of specified requirements. Review all certifications and mill test reports. ' 2_ Bolted Connections: Visually inspect all bolted connections to assure all bolts, nuts, and required washers have been installed and are of proper type, and all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contact. 3. Standard High Strength Bolts: Inspect tightness of 30 percent of all bolts (minimum of 2), selected at random in each slip - critical high strength bolted connection of structural steel framing on Project. If rejeclable bolts are found in any connection, check all remaining bolts in that connection of tightness. Inspection will conform to "Specification for Structural Joints Using STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-7 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1 ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. Tension Control (Self - Indicating) Bolts: 1 a. Perform visual inspection of all high strength bolted connections to ensure all torque -off splines have been sheared. b. Splines not sheared, verify proper bolt tension has been achieved by the application of a 1 properly calibrated testing torque device or remove and replace all bolts with un- sheared splines. Contractor will pay cost of additional inspections required. C. Welded Connections: Agency will perform following on shop and field welds: ' I . All welds, including wall and shoring connections: 10 percent visual. 2. Full penetration groove welds in transfer elements: 100 percent ultrasonic. 3. Steel decking: 100 percent visual. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field- welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: , 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than- continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1_ E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to , ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, ' rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime - painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC -SP 3 power -tool cleaning. 1 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 05120 1 Ll 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8 a 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I, Composite deck for deck slabs. 2. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional structural provisions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Welding certificates_ 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members_" 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. STEEL DECK 05310-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Steel Deck: a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. DACS, Inc. d. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. e. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. f Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. g. Roof Deck, Inc. h. United Steel Deck, Inc- i. Verco Manufacturing Co. 2.2 COMPOSITE DECK FOR FLOOR SLABS A. Composite Steel Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattem ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: I . Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Span Condition: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A_ General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion- resistant, low- velocity, power - actuated or pneumatically driven carbon - steel fasteners; or self - drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant, hexagonal washer head; self- drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 (4.8 -mm) minimum diameter. D_ Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359 -inch (0.91 -mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. STEEL DECK 05310-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z- Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory- punched hole of 3/8 -inch (9.5 -mm) minimum diameter. 1. Flat Sump Plate: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 trim) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field- ]. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. II PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufachtrer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. ' B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. ' D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. ' E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 1. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work shown. 2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on Drawings such as those required for vents, risers, conduits, etc., shall be cut and reinforced by the trade requiring the opening. ' STEEL DECK 05310-3 I - I B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. " i; 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair pain[ according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B_ Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. STEEL DECK 05310-4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter ' indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: I. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (I6 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated on Structural Drawings. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1 -1/2 inches (38 I mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. F. Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet cell closures, and Z- closures to deck according to SDI recommendations ' to provide tight - fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. G. Uplifling Loads: Install and anchor roof units to resist net uplift loading of 30 lbs per square foot at entry canopy and cave overhangs, design for 45 Ibs per square foot. ' 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. " i; 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair pain[ according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B_ Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. STEEL DECK 05310-4 1 n 1 t 1 I END OF SECTION 05310 STEED. DECK LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 05310-5 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05400 - COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Exterior load- bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non -load- bearing wall framing_ 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold- formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1 _ Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold - formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. I. For cold - formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold - formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. A1S1 Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold - Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold - Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." I COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR LOAD - BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with ' stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings, 2. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base -metal thickness as steel studs. ' C. Steel Box or Back -to -Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C- shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: I. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2.2 EXTERIOR NON - LOAD - BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. , 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base -metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary stnictiire through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel- framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003 1A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M_ C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determincd by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design , load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 5 x 0_400 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion- resistant - coated, self - drilling, self - tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of I part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high - density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install toad bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations_ 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold - formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold - Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C_ Install framing members in one -piece lengths_ D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E_ Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold- fomted metal framing. Independently 1 ?acne both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. ' H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold- foniied metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: I. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 EXTERIOR LOAD - BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely ' anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: s I . Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: I. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped r surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing internipts wall- framing continuity. Where studs cannot be ' aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer toads. I 1 E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track 1 to transfer loads. s F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G_ Install headers over wall openings wider (ban stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. France wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. N 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full - height wall studs. F I 1-l. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, , equipmen(, services, casework, heavy t Nmishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. I. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. 1. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated. Fasten at each stud intersection. ! COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 1. Bridging: Cold- rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs ' with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud - track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges_ 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip -angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure_ K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold - forted metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that coId- formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 I COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. - Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Pipe guards. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal - framed stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube railings. D. See Division 5 Section "Gratings" for metal gratings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: I . Metal nosings and treads. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacnuers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold - formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold- formed metal channels complying with MFMA -3, 1-5/8 by 1 -5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (2275) coating; 0.079 - inch (2 -mm) nominal thickness. 5. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPl 09. B. Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC -Paint 20 or SSPC -Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. I. Available Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer CM 18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. C. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha -Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer. C. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97 -670. f. Sherwin- Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme -Zinc 90 -97. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20, high- zinc -dust- content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air - entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 1 I� 1 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces_ Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld comers and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. I. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame constriction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. D. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 1 E. . Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. 2. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in- place concrete. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1 _ Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize. G. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4 -inch- (6 -nun -) thick steel plate. 2. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 -inch- (10 -m►n -) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four comers for 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) anchor bolts. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3 �j t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 3. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. H. Pipe Guards: Fabricate from 3/8 -inch- (9.5 -mm -) thick by 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2 -inch (50 -mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) anchor bolts. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: I . Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 /A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1 A): SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning_" 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC -PA I, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. I. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, ctrl, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in- place construction - 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. B_ Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: I . Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) bolts at each bollard. METAL. FABRICATIONS 05500-4 1 1 1 [I t 1 t LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 4. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. ' D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean Feld welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Preassembled steel stairs with abrasive- coating - finished formed -metal treads. 2. Industrial -type stairs with steel floor plate treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs and to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf /sq. ft. (4.79 kN /sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in_ (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above_ 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less_ B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/n) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/rn) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of I sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs. I I METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire- resistance -rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). D. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). F. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. G. Uncoated, Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170)_ H. Uncoated, Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205). I. Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class I (uncoated). J_ Woven -Wire Mesh: Intermediate- crimp, 2 -inch (50 -mm) woven -wire mesh, made from 0.135 -inch (3.5- mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). METAL STAIRS 05511 -2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063 -T6. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cast -Metal Abrasive Nosings: Cast gray iron, Class 20, with an integral abrasive finish. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. C. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe -T -Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. B. Fasteners: Provide zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe /Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air - entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated_ E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm) - -W 1.4 by W 1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: I. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc_ 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. loin components by welding, unless Qtherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces_ 3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 4. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints Where least conspicuous. METAL STAIRS 05511 -3 L ION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels). Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. I . If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 2_ Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum -board shaft -wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. 3. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. D. Abrasive - Coating- Finished, Formed -Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy - bonded abrasive finish. E. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms from rolled -steel floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. I. Configuration: 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) square top and bottom rails and posts with infill panels made from woven wire mesh in steel channel frames. 2. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. 4. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 5. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 6. Provide wall returns at ends of wall - mounted handrails_ 7. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 8. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for reconnnendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B_ Hot -dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products: Exterior Stairs (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone [A): SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components_ Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. METAL STAIRS 05511 -4 I� t t w n Li '1 1 1 A I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." I . Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. E. Install precast treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. F. Attach handrails to wall with wail brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage_ G. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2_ Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780_ END OF SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS 05511 -5 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Steel pipe and tube railings. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: I. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN /m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN /m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Inlill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of I sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 lbf /sq. ft. (1.2 kN /sq. m) applied horizontally. C. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. I. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - I LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Sharpe Products. c_ Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated_ B. Steel and Iron: I . Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold foamed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type 1 (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated). 6_ Woven -Wire Mesh: Intermediate- crimp, 2 -inch (50 -mm) woven -wire mesh, made from 0.135 - inch (3.5 -nim) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated. I. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating_ B. Anchors: Provide cast -in- place, chemical or torque- controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -2 r 1 1 fl fl LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC -Paint 5. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory- packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107; or water - resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. D. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall - mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated_ H. Woven -Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven -wire mesh crimped into 1- by -1/2- by -1/8 -inch (25- by- 13- by -3 -mm) metal channel frames. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron: t. Galvanized Railings: Hot -dip galvanize exterior railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot -dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop- Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic- phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC -PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in I m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 nun in 3 m). PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -3 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core - drilled holes and grouting annular space_ C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. I . Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. F. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -4 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.I SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Metal bar gratings. 2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: I . Floors: Uniform load of 75 Ibf /sq. ft. (3.59 kN /sq. m) or concentrated load of 2000 lbf (8.90 kN), whichever produces the greater stress. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of gratings. L Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Bar Gratings: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation. b. All American Grating, Inc. c. Barnett/Bates Corp. GRATINGS 05530-1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado d. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. e. Fisher & Ludlow- f. Grupo Metclmex, S.A. de C.V. g. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. i. Ohio Gratings, Inc. j. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc. k. Tru -Weld. 2.2 METALS A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchors: Provide anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc -dust- content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC -Paint 20. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. E. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. F. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Edge -band openings in grating that internipt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. G. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. GRATINGS 05530-2 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. I . Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior, where indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. B. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process complying with ASTM A 123 /A 123M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. I. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. D. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown_ 2. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. GRATINGS 05530-3 END OF SECTION 05530 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH Vail, Colorado I s 1 GRATINGS 05530-4